Motor Vehicle Emission Simulator
            (MOVES)
            User Guide Version, MOVESZOlOb
&EPA
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency

-------
                 Motor Vehicle Emission Simulator
                                (MOVES)
                 User Guide Version, MOVESZOlOb
                            Assessment and Standards Division
                           Office of Transportation and Air Quality
                           U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
&EPA
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
EPA-420-B-12-001
March 2012

-------
MOVES201 Ob User Guide                                              March 2012
                            Table of Contents
Preface
1.0. Gettina Started with MOVES
1.1 About MOVES
1.2 MOVES Documentation
1.2.1 About this Manual
1.2.2 Other Documentation and Online Help
1.2.3 What's next? Working with MOVES
1.3 Installation
1.3.1 System Requirements
1.3.2 Starting and Testing Your Installation
1.4 Executing Example Run Specification
1.4.1 Step-by-Step Example Run
1.4.2 MOVES Execution Database
1.4.3 MOVES Output Structure
2.0 Usina MOVES
2.1 Overview of MOVES User Interface
2.2 Navigation Panel
2.2.1 Description
2.2.2 Scale
2.2.2.1 Domain/Scale
2.2.2.2 Calculation Type
2. 2. 3 Time Spans
2. 2. 3.1 Time Aggregation Level
2.2.3.2 Years
2.2.3.3 Months
2.2.3.4 Days
2.2.3.5 Hours
2.2.4 Geographic Bounds
2.2.5 Vehicles/Equipment
2.2.6 Road Type
2.2.7 Pollutants and Processes
2.2.7.1 Processes
2.2.7.2 Pollutants
2.2.8 Manage Input Data Sets
2.2.9 Creating and Using Internal Control Strategies
2.2.9.1 Adding Strategy Files
2.2.9.2 Deleting Strategy Files
2.2.9.3 Exporting Strategy Files
2.2.9.4 Naming Strategy Files
2.2.9.5 Saving and Transferring Strategy Files
2.2.9.6 AVFT Strategy Conversion
2.2.9.7 Managing On-Road Vehicle Retrofit Data

/
1
1
2
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
10
11
13
14
15
15
17
18
19
19
20
20
20
20
27
30
31
36
36
42
43
44
44
45
45
45
45
46

United States Environmental Protection Agency                                          Page iii

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide
        2.2.9.8 Importing Retrofit Data	47
        2.2.9.9 Rate of Progress Calculation 	48
        2.2.10 Output	49
        2.2.10.1 Specifying Database, Time Period, and Units in Output	49
        2.2.10.1.1 Output Database	49
        2.2.10.1.2 Units	50
        2.2.10.1.3 Activity	50
        2.2.10.2 Specifying Emission Distinctions in Output	51
        2.2.10.2.1 Always	52
        2.2.10.2.2 For All Vehicle/Equipment Categories	53
        2.2.10.2.3 On-Road/Off Road	53
        2.2.10.2.4 Estimate Uncertainty 	54
        2.2.11 Advanced Performance Features	54

2.3 Main Menu Bar                                                                               55
2.3.1 File
2.3.2 Edit
2.3.3 Pre Processing
2.3.3.1 Database
2.3.3.2 RunSpec Summary
2.3.3.3 Tools
2.3.3.4 Data Managers (Importers)
2.3.3.4.1 Meteorology Data Importer
2. 3. 3.4.2 Source Type Population Importer
2.3.3.4.3 Age Distribution Importer
2.3.3.4.4 Vehicle Type VMT and VMT Fractions
2.3.3.4.5 Average Speed Distribution Importer
2.3.3.4.6 Road Type Distribution Importer
2.3.3.4.7 Ramp Fraction Importer
2.3.3.4.8 Fuel
2.3.3.4.9 Fueltype and Technologies
2.3.3.4.10 Zone Importer
2.3.3.4.10.1 Zone Table
2.3.3.4.10.2 ZoneRoadType Table
2.3.3.4.10.3 SCCRoadTypeDistribution Table
2.3.3.4.11 Links Importer
2.3.3.4.12 Link Source Types Importer
2.3.3.4.13 Operating Mode Distribution Importer
2.3.3.4.14 Link Drive Schedules Importer
2.3.3.4.15 Off-Network Importer
2.3.3.4.16 I/M Programs Importer
2.3.4 Action
2.3.5 Post Processing
2.3.5.1 Run MySQL Script on Output Database
2.3.5.2 Produce Summary Report
2.3.5.3 Produce State/County Map
2.3.6 Tools
2.3.6.1 Multiple RunSpec Creator
2.3.6.2 Process DONE Files
2.3.6.3 Database Converter
2. 3. 7 Settings
2.3.7.1 Configure MOVES
2.3.8 Help
56
56
56
58
59
60
62
68
68
69
69
71
72
73
74
76
77
77
78
78
78
79
80
80
80
81
82
83
83
85
89
91
92
96
96
97
98
99
Page iv                                                        United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012
Appendix A - Using MOVES to Generate Lookup Tables	A-l
Appendix B - Working with the MySQL Data	B-l
       Appendix Bl- Linking To MySQL Tables from MS OFFICE 2007	 B-l
       Appendix B2 - Guide To Linking To MySQL from MS Office 2003	 B-18
Appendix C - Running MOVES from the Command Line	C-l
Appendix D - Creating an On-Road Retrofit Input File	D-2
Appendix E - Best Practices	E-l
Appendix F - Stage II Refueling Control Programs	F-l
Appendix G - MOVES Project Level Example	G-l
Appendix H - County Data Manager Example	H-l
Appendix I - MOVES Decoder	 1-1
Appendix J- Configuring MOVES	J-l
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                              Page v

-------

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

Preface

       MOVES2010b, released in March 2012, and MOVES2010a, released in August 2010, are
minor updates to MOVES2010, EPA's state-of-the-art tool for estimating emissions from
highway vehicles. EPA released MOVES2010a to allow MOVES users to easily account for
emissions under new car and light truck energy and greenhouse gas standards and to benefit from
several improvements to MOVES general performance.

       MOVES2010a incorporated new car and light truck greenhouse gas emissions standards
affecting model years 2012-and-later (published May 7, 20101) and updated effects of corporate
average fuel economy standards affecting model years 2008-2011.2  MOVES2010a included
reductions in greenhouse gases associated with those standards in future calendar years, and
small reductions in refueling and sulfur-related emissions associated with the reductions in
vehicle fuel consumption.

       MOVES2010a also included a number of other improvements. Major changes are listed
in the table below. The net impact of these changes on criteria pollutant emissions was small.
Compared to MOVES2010 (released in December 2009), most regional inventory runs should
see an increase in methane emissions and a small decrease in the associated Volatile Organic
Compound (VOC) and air toxics emissions. However, comparisons for runs that focus on a
particular project or sourcetype may vary.

       Instructions for downloading and installing MOVES2010b are available on the MOVES
web page http://www.epa.gov/otaq/models/moves/.  Note that users will find that RunSpecs and
input databases developed with MOVES2010 and/or MOVES2010a may need modification to
run with MOVES2010b. Regenerate fuelFormulation input strategy files. Output databases will
need to be recreated with a new name since several new tables have been added. You should
always specify which version of MOVES was used to create emissions results.

       MOVES2010b is faster and works better on networks. It is about 10% faster for county
inventory runs. Additional debugging features and improvements in error recovery during
network faults have been made which make networked operation more efficient. MOVES2010b
also allows up to 8 worker processes on an individual computer. Actual benchmark tests have
shown that 2-4 workers result in significantly improved run times.

       Improvements to the data managers make MOVES2010b easier to use. Additional error
checks have been added to the County Data Manager (CDM) and the Project Data Manager
(PDM) to help prevent run failures due to conflicts between RunSpec parameters and user data.
Also, the Alternative Vehicle and Fuel Technologies (AVFT) input has been moved from the
Strategies panel to CDM and PDM.  This makes data entry consistent with other user inputs and
takes advantage of the CDM and PDM error checks.
1  http://www.regulations.gov/#!documentDetail;D=EPA-HQ-OAR-2009-0472-11424
2  http://www.regulations.gov/*!documentDetail;D=NHTSA-2006-24309-0007 and
http://www.regulations.gov/#!documentDetail;D=NHTSA-2009-0062-0001
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                                Page i

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

       Custom domain improvements may reduce the number of runs needed and increase
functionality. The Custom domain option now allows users to define separate zones, with
separate Vehicle Miles Travelled (VMT) and some other activity inputs for each zone.  Users can
also setup a multi-county custom code domain with individual counties defined as separate
zones. MOVES2010b output will give emission results separately for each zone. In previous
versions of MOVES, users could not specify different activities in  difference parts of a custom
domain or get separate results for different parts of a custom domain. In addition, SCC output
option is now fully functional in custom domain runs.

       MOVES2010b has added functionality to the emission rates option to make it easier to
use. Refueling emissions  have been added to the RatePerDistance and the RatePerVehicle
tables. In previous versions of MOVES, refueling emissions could only be calculated using
inventory mode.  The calculation of extended idle emissions in SCC output has been improved.
And, the RunSpec options that are not applicable for emissions rates calculations are now
grayed-out in the GUI.

       More detailed pollutant output has been added. This will improve the use of MOVES
results in air quality modeling. Also, Naphthalene now splits into two parts: gaseous and
paniculate fractions to improve output to air quality modeling.

       In MOVES2010b,  Air Toxics emissions calculations have been improved. Note that
minor changes to standard air toxics coefficients  may result in small changes to air toxics
emissions.

       MOVES2010b has been updated to use newer versions of Java (version 1.7.0) and
MySQL (version 5.5.12).  The MOVES2010b Installation Suite installs the correct versions of
Java and MySQL, the MOVES2010b code and a new default MOVES database.  Some changes
to MOVES and the MOVES default database will make existing RunSpecs and user input  to the
CDM and PDM databases created in previous versions of MOVES incompatible with
MOVES2010b.  Converters have been created to convert those RunSpecs and databases to
MOVES2010b format.

       In MOVES2010b,  new fields, T50 and T90, which provide more detailed measures of
fuel volatility, have been added to the default fuel formulation tables.  These fields allow for
more detailed modeling of specific fuel effects for users who need this capability. However,
most users will not need to change field specifications in MOVES, but existing user input
databases created with previous versions of MOVES will still need to be converted.

       MOVES2010b also includes some other minor model improvements. New counties in
Alaska and Colorado created after 2000 have been added to the list of available counties.
However, no default data is available for these counties and they are not included in national
scale runs.  Also, additional warning messages have been added to guide users. The I/M
importer was removed from preprocessor menu options and is now only accessible from the
CDM and PDM. Fixes to  minor errors in certain national scale runs have also been made.
Page ii                                                United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

1.0. Getting Started with MOVES

       MOVES is the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's (EPA) Motor Vehicle Emission
Simulator. It helps the user to answer "what if questions, such as "How would paniculate
matter emissions decrease in my state on a typical weekday if truck travel was reduced during
rush hour?" or "How does the total hydrocarbon emission rate change if my fleet switches to
gasoline from diesel fuel?" The purpose of the tool is to provide an accurate estimate of
emissions from mobile sources under a wide range of user-defined conditions.

       In the modeling process, the user specifies vehicle types, time periods, geographical
areas, pollutants, vehicle operating characteristics, and road types to be modeled.  The model
then performs a series of calculations, which have been carefully developed to accurately reflect
vehicle operating processes, such as cold start or extended idle, and provide estimates of bulk
emissions or emission rates. Specifying the characteristics of the particular scenario to be
modeled  is done by creating a Run Specification, or RunSpec.

       The MOVES model is different from previous EPA mobile source emissions models in
that it was deliberately designed to work with databases. With this design, new data that may
become available can be more easily incorporated into the model. In addition, MOVES allows
and facilitates the import of data specific to a user's unique needs.

       The MOVES model includes a "default" database that summarizes emission relevant
information for the entire United States.  The data for this database comes from many sources
including EPA research studies, Census Bureau vehicle surveys, Federal Highway
Administration travel data, and other federal, state, local, industry and academic sources. The
MOVES  team continually works to improve this database, but, for many uses, up-to-date local
inputs will be more appropriate, especially for analyses supporting State Implementation Plans
(SIPs) and conformity determinations.

1.1 About MOVES

       MOVES2010b is the latest version of the MOVES emissions modeling tool.
MOVES2010b builds on the functionality of previous MOVES versions: MOVES2004,
MOVESDemo, DraftMOVES2009, MOVES2010 and MOVES2010a.  MOVES2010b can be
used to estimate national, state, and county level inventories of criteria air pollutants, greenhouse
gas emissions, and some mobile source air toxics from highway vehicles. Additionally, MOVES
can make projections for energy consumption (total, petroleum-based, and fossil-based).

       MOVES2010b may be used for official use, although users are not required to do so.
Please see the MOVES2010b policy statement available on the EPA's MOVES web site
http://www.epa.gov/otaq/models/moves/index.htm for EPA's policy on selecting appropriate
models for official mobile source emission estimates.

       MOVES is distributed free of charge by EPA pursuant to the GNU General Public
License (GPL). It is written in Java™ and uses the MySQL relational database management
system.  Oracle Corporation owns, operates, and supports MySQL, and allows distribution of the
database  system pursuant to the GNU GPL.  The principal user inputs and outputs, and the
internal working storage locations for MOVES  are MySQL databases.  The MOVES model

United States Environmental Protection Agency                                       Page 1

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

includes a "default" input database, which uses national data and allocation factors to
approximate results for the 3,222 counties in the United States, District of Columbia, Puerto
Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. MOVES is capable of modeling emissions for the calendar
years 1990 and 1999-2050.

      With MOVES2010b, MOVES has been migrated from the 5.1.32 version of MySQL to
version 5.5.12 and from the Java Runtime for version 1.6.0_12 to the Java Runtime version
1.7.0.

      MOVES is set up to run both a "Master" and one or more "Workers".  This allows users
to operate MOVES on a single computer system or on a network of computers.  See Appendix J
- MOVES Configurations for more information on configuring MOVES for multicomputer
setups.

1.2 MOVES Documentation

      The following section highlights the contents of this manual, how best to use the manual,
and where additional information may be found.

1.2.1 About this Manual

      The MOVES User Guide focuses on operating MOVES software to create and execute
Run Specifications (RunSpecs).

      Throughout this document, information may be highlighted to make it easier to find
solutions to problems or to avoid errors using the following prompts:

      X CAUTION! Cautions must be observed to avoid errors in execution or to ensure the
                   intended execution will occur.

       ^ NOTE Notes contain important information about the panel being described.


            Tips contain hints for input or better operation of the run.


      The MOVES2010b User Guide is accessible as a .pdf file under the Help menu in the
MOVES interface.

1.2.2 Other Documentation and Online Help

      Additional documentation covering the following topics is available for MOVES2010b.

             Installation:  An Installation  Suite is available for MOVES2010b. It guides the
      user through the MOVES system requirements and the process for installing the MOVES
      program and associated software.
Page 2                                               United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

             Software Design: An updated MOVES Software Design and Reference Manual
       (SDRM) will be available on the MOVES website in 2012. The SDRM will cover the
       basic concepts and functional design of the software and the underlying MySQL
       database, including technical specifications for all calculations performed in the model.
       It is intended to answer more detailed and substantive questions about the MOVES
       software than those addressed in this guide.

             MOVES Database Documentation:  More detailed documentation of the
       MOVES database can be found within the README folder of the database itself. For
       example, C:\MySQL\data\movesdbyyyymmdd\readme

1.2.3 What's next? Working with MOVES

       Depending on the status of your installation and how familiar you are with MOVES, you
have several  options for next steps to get up and running with MOVES.

          =>    If you have just installed MOVES or are uncertain about your installation,
                follow the instructions in Starting and Testing Your Installation - Section
                1.3.2

          =>    If MOVES is installed and operational on your computer, you should run the
                example to become more familiar with the tool before moving on.  See
                Executing Example Run Specification - Section 1.4.

          =>    If you have questions about the MOVES Graphical User Interface (GUI) or
                executing a run, see Overview of MOVES User Interface - Section 2.1 of
                this guide.


          =>    If you are ready to begin using MOVES, see Using MOVES - Section 2.

          =>    If you would like to work through an example, a set of sample scenarios are
                included in the Appendices.

          =>    If you would like to get started using MOVES for regular work, advice and
                guidance on using MOVES is available on the MOVES website.

       The rest of this guide provides information on using the MOVES2010b model.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                      Page 3

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
  1.3 Installation

       Step-by-step instructions on installation are supplied by EPA in the MOVES2010b
Installation Suite.  The MOVES2010b Installation Suite consists of the required installation
programs (MySQL 5.5.12, Java 1.7.0, MOVES2010b, MySQL Query Browser, and MySQL
ODBC).
         MOVES Installation Suite
                                                                             - n x
                    MOVES2010b Installation Suite (for 32/64-bit Windows)
        'Use 'Main Screen'to (un)install all MOVES components. Or alternatively go through tabs 1 - 6 to (un)install each individual component
                    Release Date
                   February 10, 2012

Main Screen
(InstallAII)
MOVES2
MOVES Co
1 . Install Java
Only
2. Remove
Old MySQL
JlOb System Informati
mponent Status
Core Components:
Java 1.7.0: I
MySQL 55. 12: I
MySQL Data: I
MOVES2010bApp.: I
MOVES Database: l
Optional Components:
Query Browser: I
Workbench 5.2 1
MySQL ODBC: I
Old Components (Recomn
i stalled
istalled
i stalled
nknown
nknown
istalled
nknown
istalled
lendedtc



3. Setup
MySQL Only

4. Install 5. Insta
MOVES Only QB/WB (
II 6. Install
Dnly ODBC Onl
Help / Contact
Info

Install Location


C:\Prograrn FilesUavaljdkU.O
C:lProgram FilesWySQUMySQL Server 5.5
CAMySQUData
Unknown
Unknown



C:\Program FileslMySQLWIySQL Tools for 5.0
Unknown
SOFTWARElMySQLABMMySQL Connector/ODBC 5.1
Be Removed):
Remove MySQL

Action
Install Log
Install Guide
Install Guide
DB Migrate
Install Guide
Find it

Install Guide
Refresh
Reinstall
Remove
Test MySQL
Install
Run MOVES
Remove
Install
Install Guide |
Install
5.0 Remove MySQL5.1


Windows System Information:
Windows XP 32 Bit, version: 5.1 .2; C:\WINDOWS
CPU: 586; 8 processor(s); total memory: 3326 MB; available memory: 2258 MB









         This Suite invokes DOS screens to perform necessary tasks during installation; please disregard all popup DOS screens.
                                                                           Exit Suite
1.3.1 System Requirements

       MOVES is a 32-bit application and has been developed to work with Microsoft Windows
XP, VISTA, and Windows 7 environments.

^ NOTE Installing MOVES with Microsoft Vista or Windows? may require changes to the User
         Access Control (UAC) security settings. The computer(s) used to run either of the
         MOVES application programs must have at least 512 MB of RAM, although it is
         recommended that additional memory be available to improve execution times.
         Because execution run time performance is a constraint with MOVES, a high speed
         processor(s) is highly recommended.

       The MOVES program is open source and is written in JAVA and MySQL.
Page 4
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
 March 2012
       The MOVES Default database distributed with MOVES2010b requires approximately
1.0 GB of disk storage.  MOVES Worker and Output databases are often large, so several
additional gigabytes of disk space should be available on all machines used to run either the
MOVES Master and/or the MOVES Worker programs. Users who conduct many MOVES runs
will want to use late-model, high-performance microcomputer systems.

1.3.2 Starting and Testing Your Installation

       After all the necessary components of the MOVES2010b Installation Suite have been
executed, test the installation with the following steps.

           1. Double-click the MOVES Master program icon.  When starting the MOVES
              Master program, the About MOVES panel will appear.

           2. Click the OK button to continue.
             About MOVES201 Ob
                    MOVES2010I)
                    This version:
                    Computer ID:
                    Copyright U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                    Licensed for use pursuant to the GNU General Public License (GPL)
                    For information about the GPL see http:/frvww.gnu.org1icenses/
 7 NOTE This panel identifies the version of MOVES that is in use and includes the version date,
        the EPA copyright, and a link for the GNU General Public License (GPL) website.
        Also included is the Computer ID or name. This panel will appear only at start-up.

           3.  Execute the Example Run Specification (MOVES2010bExample.mrs) as
              described in the following section.

1.4 Executing Example Run Specification

       The MOVES2010b Example Run Specification (MOVES2010bExample.mrs) models
the entire U.S. for one year (1999) at the most aggregate level. It estimates total energy
consumption and emissions of methane and nitrous oxide for the running, start, and extended idle
processes for all vehicle (use) types (gasoline, diesel, and CNG transit buses) and roadway types.
Vehicle Miles Traveled (VMT) is also estimated.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
Page 5

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

1.4.1 Step-by-Step Example Run

      If MySQL and MOVES2010b have been installed, the MySQL server and the MOVES
Master program have been started, and the MOVES Worker program(s) are operational, the
example RunSpec can be executed as follows:

       1.  Select File, Open on the Main Menu Bar.

      2.  Navigate, if necessary, to the top level of the MOVES directory.

      3   Select the MOVES2010bExample.mrs file

      4.  Select Output, then General Output on the Navigation Panel, which is the left-side
      panel. Select or click on Create Database to establish a database into which results
      should be placed.  Select or enter a database name.

7 NOTE Many MOVES features request that the user create input or output databases. These
        database names must be consistent with MySQL naming conventions. In general, this
        means they may contain letters,  numbers, "_"(underscore) and "$". They may not
        contain spaces, special characters, or be "reserved words" (SQL words such as "select",
        "where", "delete", etc.). See Best Practices - Appendix E for additional advice on
        naming MOVES databases.

      5.  Select Action, Execute on the Main Menu Bar to start the RunSpec.  The GUI will
      ask you if you want to save the RunSpec before executing. You may choose Yes, No or
      Cancel.  The RunSpec will execute if either Yes or No are chosen, but selecting Cancel
      will not execute and will allow users to make changes to the RunSpec.  The RunSpec
      may take up to 15 minutes to process.

      6.  The output will be saved in the MySQL relational database named in Step 4.  The
      output can be reviewed using the Post-Processing menu options described in Section
      2.3.5 or by viewing the database directly using MySQL commands, either through the
      command prompt window or through MySQL Query Browser.

1.4.2 MOVES Execution Database

      After Execute has been selected, MOVES begins to compile and populate all the
necessary tables in the MOVES Execution database. This database is similar in many respects
to the default database, but there are several key differences.
      The MOVES Execution database is the location where conflicts are resolved between
the default database and user input databases. First, information is pulled from the Domain
Input Database on the Geographic Bounds panel (see Section 2.2.4)  MOVES makes note of
the tables and key fields within the tables that are imported and uses that to limit what is
imported from database tables that are  lower in the hierarchy. Added next to the MOVES
Execution database are user input databases listed on the Manage Input Data Sets panel (see
Section 2.2.8), with the last database listed taking priority over those listed above it. Finally,
MOVES uses the default database to populate the remaining tables not provided by the user.

Page 6                                               United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

       Also, the MOVES Execution database contains data in tables that are empty in the
default database and additional tables that are not present in the default database. These tables
are often not complete.  To save memory, much of the additional data is cleared after it is used in
calculations.  Users can save more of this data by checking one or more Save Data boxes on the
Advanced Performance Features panel (see Section 2.2.11)

 7 NOTE The  Save Data process lengthens run time and the tables it produces are often difficult
to interpret correctly.

1.4.3 MOVES Output Structure

           The output database will typically contain eleven tables:

       1.  MOVESOutput: This table contains the inventory emission results (emissionQuant)
       of the run disaggregated by parameters such as Year, Month, Day, Source Type, County,
       Fuel, Model-Year, Road-type, SCC, and Emission Process.

       XCaution!  If the Emission Rates calculation type is selected on the Scale panel, the
                   emissionQuant values will represent an intermediate step in the rates
                   calculations rather than the real emissions for that time and place. To reduce
                   the size of the MOVESOutput table, use the Aggregation and Data
                   Handling panel on the Advanced Performance Features screen to select
                   Clear MOVESOutput after rate calculations. The user may also clear the
                   MOVESActivityOutput by selecting Clear MOVESActivityOutput after
                   rate calculations
                     Aggregation and Data Handling
                     O Do Not Perform Final Aggregation
                     d Clear MOVESOutput after rate calculations
                     D Clear MOVESActivityOutpiJt after rate calculations
                    I	_	|

       2.  movesactivityoutput:  This table provides information on the vehicle activity
       generated and used in the run. It is disaggregated by parameters such as Year, Month,
       Day, County, Fuel, Model-Year, Road-type, and SCC. Activity is not distinguished by
       pollutant and process.  If a certain activity type (see Activity - Section 2.2.10.1.3) is not
       needed for the emission processes in a run, it is not generated.

       7 NOTE In the movesactivityoutput table, population always has month, day & hour
               keys of zero (i.e. "doesn't matter") because population is assumed constant in
               time across an entire year.  This scheme reduces table size, but requires care
               when filtering results and when joining to other tables. Also, if you assign some
               VMT to a road type, but then do not select that road type in the RunSpec, the
               population will be lower than it should be.  This is because the assigned VMT is
               not used when calculating  population. Users should model all road types
               (where VMT is allocated) to ensure proper calculations.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                        Page 1

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

       3. movesrun: This table contains information about the date and time of the run,
       information about the run specifications, and the name of the units in which MOVES
       outputs are represented.  These include units for energy (i.e., joules), emissions (i.e.,
       tons), VMT (i.e., miles), and time units (i.e., months, days, hours, etc.).

       4. moveserror:  This table contains any error messages or diagnostic information that
       might be generated if the MOVES run is unsuccessful.

       5. movesworkersused: This table contains information as to which copy of the
       MOVES Worker Program processed portions of the run.  It is of interest if the run is
       executed on a multi-computer configuration.

       6. activitytype:  This table lists the activity types that can be reported in the
       movesactivityoutput table and provides their activitytypeid.  In MOVES2010b, this table
       lists: distance traveled, source hours, extended idle hours, source hours operating, source
       hours parked, population, and starts (See Activity - Section 2.2.10.1.3).

       7. moveseventlog: This table is used by MOVES programmers for storing diagnostic
       results.  It contains no information useful to users.

       8. rateperdistance:  When Emission Rates is selected on the Scale panel, the
       ratePerDistance table stores emissions as rates per distance (e.g. grams per mile) with the
       units depending on those selected in the run specification. This table includes rates for
       exhaust and evaporative emissions that occur while vehicles are on "real roads".  These
       include running loss evaporative  emissions, evaporative permeation, and liquid leaks that
       occur while the vehicle is operating on the road. It also includes refueling emissions for
       the portion that is allocated to road operation (i.e., fuel consumed during running
       operation on the road).  It does not include rates for starts, extended idle, diurnal and hot
       soak operation or refueling and permeation emissions associated with a parked vehicle or
       a vehicle start.

       9. rateperprofile: When Emission Rates is selected on the Scale panel, the
       ratePerProfile table stores vapor venting  emissions from parked vehicles as rates per
       vehicle (e.g. grams per vehicle).  Note that the denominator is the total vehicle
       population—not just the vehicles that are parked.  The temperature profile id in this
       table refers to a particular daily pattern of temperatures, important because vapor venting
       depends on temperatures in both the current and previous hours.

       10. ratepervehicle:  When Emission Rates is selected on the Scale panel, the
       ratePerProfile table stores emissions from starts and extended idle, and some evaporative
       emissions (permeation and liquid leaks) from parked vehicles as rates per vehicle (e.g.
       grams per vehicle). Note that the denominator for national and county level runs is the
       total vehicle population—not just the vehicles that are parked.  However, for project-level
       runs the denominator for start emission rates is the number of starts  in the hour, and the
       denominator for extended idle emission rates is the vehicle-hours of extended idle
       activity in the hour.
Page 8                                                 United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

       11. movestablesused: This table contains a list of the tables used when executing the
       RunSpec and the source database for each table. The numbering of the
       tableUseSequence is such that lower numbers take priority. Some tables may be listed
       more than once; this occurs when information comes from both the user and default
       databases.

       12. bundletracking: This table contains information about data that is processed by the
       MOVES master and workers.  It is mainly used by the MOVES developers for tracking
       MOVES performance.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                       Page 9

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

2.0 Using MOVES

      Using MOVES, the user can model various scenarios in order to determine specific
emissions profiles.  To use MOVES, the user prepares a Run Specification (RunSpec) to define
the place, time, vehicle, road, fuel, emission producing process, and pollutant parameters. The
RunSpec is an XML file that can be edited and executed manually or with the MOVES
Graphical User Interface (GUI).  This section of the User Guide gives an overview of the screen
layout and navigation functions of the GUI and provides details on how to create and modify a
RunSpec.

      Running MOVES from the Command Line - Appendix C provides instructions for
how MOVES can be executed without running its graphical user interface.  This may be useful
in situations where repeated  or unattended runs are needed, or when another computer program
is used to execute MOVES.  This "batch mode" or "command line" interface presumes that a
MOVES RunSpec file has been prepared.

      Although a full range of default data is available in MOVES, the allocation of the default
data down to the county level is based on a generalized algorithm and will not be the most recent
nor best available local data.  Therefore, MOVES is designed to allow the user to customize the
model. The primary reasons a user would customize MOVES are:

   •  To better represent conditions and vehicle activity in a local area, especially for use in
      conformity demonstrations or for SIP purposes; and,

   •  To alter inputs for "what-if' analysis, such as the use of different I/M or fuel scenarios.

      Several components of the model are intended to facilitate customization.  These include
the Strategies procedures  described below.  MOVES also allows users to provide User Input
Databases and to use various Importers with the County Data Manager, and Project Data
Manager described later in this document.
  NOTE Many MOVES features request that the user create input or output databases.  These
        database names must be consistent with MySQL naming conventions. In general, this
        means they may contain letters, numbers, "_"(underscore) and "$". They may not
        contain  spaces, special characters, or be "reserved words" (SQL words such as "select".
        "where", "delete", etc.). See Best Practices - Appendix E for additional advice on
        naming  MOVES databases.
Page 10                                              United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
  March 2012
2.1 Overview of MOVES User Interface

       The MOVES Graphical User Interface (GUI) consists of a Main Menu Bar, a Navigation
Panel, and a Detail Panel.  The Main Menu Bar and Navigation Panel are available on every
screen as the user prepares for execution of the RunSpec. When the user selects a menu item
from the Navigation Panel, the Detail Panel  displays data elements specific to the parameter(s)
defined by the menu item, and provides a platform for user input of parameter specifications.
      MOVES - ID 597940262450878055
    File  Edit Pre Processing  Action
            Geographic Bounds
     !_jj   ' Vehicles/Equipment


           Road Type


           Pollutants And Proce

           Manage Input Data


      +1    Strategies


     El    Output

           Advanced Perform
                           Postprocessing T_ools  Settings Help
During execution of a RunSpec, a progress indicator will appear on the screen.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
Page 11

-------
March 2012
                 MOVES2010b User Guide
    B MOVES - C:\EPA\MOVESTestSuite\Runspecs\MOVES
     File Edit Preprocessing Action Postprocessing lools  Settings Help
'938958837B876076
               Generating bundles

               estimating completion...
                  MOVES Worker - ID 210374241 3405662773
                 Status:
                                   Idle
                 Number of Files Processed:  0
                 Number of Interruptions:    0
                 Computer ID: DC2756hwwachol>   Worker Release: 2010/08/26
     Execute active RunSpec
       The Main Menu Bar will remain available, allowing the user to pause, resume, or stop
(cancel) the RunSpec during execution.

       The MOVES model features "mouse hover" user help throughout the model. To use it,
the user simply places the mouse over a particular MOVES GUI icon or command and keeps it
still. A small help box will appear with a brief text message; for example, the readiness status of
a Navigation Panel icon, the keyboard combination required to execute a command from the
Main Menu Bar, or a brief description of a Detail Panel icon.

       Most panels use buttons and scroll or drop down list boxes, typified by the Select All
Delete and Add buttons.  These buttons will be enabled or disabled based upon selection in the
associated list box. For example, a Delete button will be disabled until a selection is made in the
associated list box.

 7 Note  When a selection is identified (e.g., by highlighting one state or county in a
         Geographic  Bounds list box), the user must click the Add button to add the selection
         to the RunSpec. The user can consult the associated icon in the Navigation Panel to
         determine if the parameter has been sufficiently defined.  If the parameter icon changes
         from exclamation point to check mark, the parameter definition is sufficient to allow
         the RunSpec to be executed.
Page 12
      United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                   March 2012
2.2 Navigation Panel

       The Navigation Panel appears on the left side of the MOVES screen and includes
parameters the user must consider when setting up a RunSpec.
              Description

              Scale

              Time Spans

              Geographic Bounds

              Vehicles.'Equipment

              Road Type

              Pollutants And Processes

              Manage Input Data Sets

              Strategies

              Output

              Advanced Performance Features
       Selecting an item from the Navigation
Panel will open a user interface in the Detail Panel
in the center of the MOVES screen.  In some
cases, the RunSpec parameter listed on the
Navigation Panel is split into sub-topics; these
items are shown with an icon (LU or  Fh that
allows the list of sub-topics to be expanded or
collapsed. The user must click on the sub-topic
for the user interface to be opened.

       The Navigation Panel includes icons that
display the readiness status of the various
RunSpec parameters.  A RunSpec will not be
executable if an exclamation mark is shown for
any parameter.
                 Icon   Meaning
                                Needs additional user supplied data.
                                    Sufficiently filled in to run.
                        Default data present, but otherwise sufficiently filled
                                            in to run.
                        Parameter expand/collapse.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                 Page 13

-------
March 2012
                        MOVES2010b User Guide
 7 Note  Parameters may be visited in any order; however some choices affect the choices
         available in other screens. In particular, changing the Scale parameters can impact
         other parameter choices.  You may wish to save your RunSpec before switching Scales
         and to pay attention to the Navigation Panel icons after making any selection to make
         sure it did not affect another parameter.

!Tip The icons shown on the sample GUI in this document do not necessarily indicate which
      sections/subsections will have default data available.

!Tip A RunSpec cannot be executed until all necessary data are supplied.

2.2.1 Description

       Select Description, the first item on the Navigation Panel, to open a scrollable text
window that allows the user to give the RunSpec a particular textual description. This is useful
for keeping track of various RunSpecs or providing information for someone else looking at the
file (such as "This run produces annual total energy consumption for the nation in 1999").  The
text  entered in the Description Panel is for documentation purposes only. Its contents are
reported for each run in the MOVESRun table.
     B MOVES - C:\EPA\MOVESTestSuite\Runspecs\MOVES2010b.mrs - ID 189389588378876076
        Edit Preprocessing  Action Postprocessing  lools  Settings Help

            Scale

            Time Spans

            Geographic Bounds

      [+]    Vehicles/Equipment

            Road Type

            Pollutants And Processes

            Manage Input Data Sets

      \+\    Strategies

      \+\    Output

          • 4 Advanced Performance Feature
Description:
Example Run Specification
forMOVES2010t).

CH4, N20, Total Energy, VMT.

All vehicles, roadtypes, processes.

Gasoline diesel fuel and cng transit busses.
Run at preaggregated national level.
Time fully preaggregated.
    I Stop execution of active RunSpec
Page 14
             United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

XCaution!  Do not use double quote, ampersand, or back slash characters (" , & ,or /) as part
             of the Description.  Up to 5,000 characters of text may be entered to describe the
             RunSpec.

     The default Description is blank and the MOVES model can be run without a Description.
     However, it is considered a best practice to carefully describe each and every version of a
     RunSpec.  This will assist in documenting the purpose of that particular MOVES run.  See
     Best Practices - Appendix E for additional information.

2.2.2 Scale

       Select Scale on the Navigation Panel to choose the level of detail represented by the
MOVES input database and whether the model will calculate emissions sum or emissions rate
data.

2.2.2.1 Domain/Scale

       National Domain/Scale is the default selection in MOVES. If National Domain/Scale
is selected, data collected on a nation-wide level is apportioned or allocated to states or counties.
This data will differ from data collected for a specific state or county.  For example, consider
vehicle miles traveled. If using the National Domain/Scale, the primary input is national VMT
data which is then allocated to a county or state.  The allocation does not take into account
factors that may differ between areas of the country (e.g. age distribution). Consequently, a
model  run for two states or counties that uses the National Domain/Scale may not provide an
accurate portrayal of specific emission differences between these counties  or states that would
occur due to dissimilar vehicle age distributions or other factors. For these reasons, the National
Domain/Scale cannot be used by states for preparing SIP or conformity analyses.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                       Page 15

-------
March 2012
                                    MOVES2010b User Guide
         Edit Pre Processing  Action Post Processing  Tools Settings Help

             Description




             Time Spans

             Geographic Bounds

      \+\     Vehicles Equipment

             Road Type

             Pollutants And Processes

             Manage Input Data Sets
      \+\  jf Strategies

      \+\  J  output

             Advanced Performance Features
Domain'Scale
• National Use the default national database with default state and local allocation factors.

            Caution: Do not use this scale setting for SIP or conformity
          fL analyses. The allocation factors and other defaults applied at
        /1\ the state or county level have not been verified against specific
        f " * state or county data and do not meet regulatory requirements for
            SIPs and conformity determinations.
O County  Select or define a single county that is the entire domain.
        Note: Use this scale setting for SIP and regional conformity analysis.
        Use of this scale setting requires user-supplied local data for most
        activity and fleet inputs.
O Project Use project domain inputs.
        Note: Use this scale setting for project-level analysis for conformity,
        NEPA, or any other regulatory purpose. Use of this scale setting requires
        user-supplied data at the link level for activity and fleet inputs that
        describe a particular transportation project.
Calculation Type
8 Inventory
             Mass and/or Energy within a region and time span.
O Emission Rates Mass and/or Energy per unit of activity.
             MOVESScenariolD:
                                     /j\ Caution: Changing these selections changes the contents of other
                                    /' \ input panels. These changes may include losing previous data contents.
     Stop execution of active RunSpec
        For a finer level of detail about a particular area, the user can choose the County
Domain/Scale. With this scale choice, the model will replace national default allocations with
user-supplied data.  Only one year and one county (or custom domain) can be selected in the
Time Span and Geographic Bounds panels, respectively.  By supplying local data through the
County Data Manager, you can provide more accurate information about a particular state or
county than would be provided using the National Domain/Scale. The County Domain/Scale
is intended to be used when doing SIP or regional conformity analyses.

        Project Domain/Scale is the  finest level of modeling in MOVES. It allows  the user to
model the emission effects from a group of specific roadway links and/or a  single off-network
location. The definition of a roadway link is a section of any road where a vehicle is moving for
more than three seconds. An off-network location is  an area of activity that is not a roadway, for
example a parking lot where vehicle starts and extended  idling emissions are produced.  The use
of the Project Domain/Scale requires the user to completely define the individual project (i.e.,
specify all individual roadway links and/or the off-network area).  All of the project level data is
entered in the Project Data Manager.  If specified correctly, the MOVES Project Domain/Scale
will utilize  MOVES emission rates and other factors  to correctly calculate  emission inventory
results for the user's defined project.

 ^ Note  MOVES2010b is not capable of modeling any evaporative emission processes when
          using Project Domain/Scale. EPA plans to add this feature in future versions of
          MOVES.
Page 16
                        United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

       Note that switching scales is a major change to the RunSpec.  It affects the operation of
other Navigation Panel items and may cause previous RunSpec specifications to be changed or
lost. You may wish to save your RunSpec before switching scales. Also, the choice the user
makes on the Domain/Scale panel affects the selections that will be presented in the Geographic
Bounds detail panel. These differences are covered in greater detail in Geographic Bounds -
Section 2.2.4

2.2.2.2 Calculation Type

       In this section of the panel, you can choose the type of calculation that will occur in the
RunSpec. MOVES will calculate the quantity of emissions and/or energy used within a region
and time span if the user selects the Inventory button. This output is stored in the
MOVESOutput and the Movesactivityoutput tables.

       The rate at which emissions occur (the mass and/or energy per unit of activity) is
calculated if the user selects the "Emission Rates" button. This output is stored in the
RatePerDistance, RatePerProfile and RatePerVehicle Tables.

         Calculation Type
         (§ Inventory      Mass and/or Energy within a region and time span.

         C Emission Rates Mass and/or Energy per unit of activity.
       If you select Emission Rates, you must assign a MOVESScenarioID which will be used
in the rates tables.  The MOVESScenarioID should be a unique identifier for the scenario for
which the rates apply.

       See Appendix A - Using MOVES to Generate Lookup Tables for more information on
defining scenarios.

XCaution!    Do not type in a Scenario ID longer than 40 characters.

XCaution!    Do not use double quote, ampersand, or back slash characters (" , & ,or /)  as part
              of the MOVES Scenario ID.

7 Note Calculating Emission Rates requires more run time and more output space than
        inventory calculations, so this choice should be selected with care.  See Appendix A -
        Using MOVES to Generate Lookup Tables for advice on using the Emission Rates
        option to develop a "lookup table" of rates.

^ Note While activity is "divided out" in the Emission Rates output, the amount of time spent
        driving affects the evaporative emission rates. Therefore, it is important to input
        realistic VMT, Population, Average Speed Distribution and Road Type Distribution
        information.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                       Page 17

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
 7 Note      If Emission Rates is selected as the Calculation Type, then several other panels
are affected:

             1) If National Domain/Scale is selected, only Zone & Link can be chosen in the
        Region section of the Geographic Bounds panel, or  Ib) if County or Project
        Domain/Scale is selected, only Zone & Link or Custom Domain can be chosen;

             2) The Distance Traveled and Population boxes on the General Output panel
        are automatically checked; and

             3) The Road Type and Emission Process boxes are automatically selected on the
        Output Emission Detail panel

2.2.3 Time Spans

       MOVES can be set to model specific time periods by selecting Time Spans on the
Navigation Panel.  Clicking Time Spans will open the panel shown below.
B MOVES -C:\EPAWOVESTestSuite\Runspecs\MOVES2010b.nirs -ID 189389588378876076 0(5) (x)
File Edit Preprocessing Action Postprocessing Tools Settings Help
Description
Scale
Geographic Bounds
0 J Vehicles/Equipment
Road Type
Pollutants And Processes
Manage Input Data Sets
0 t Strategies
0 Output
Advanced Performance Features


iSiYear O Month O Day O Hour


Select Year: |~| Add 0 January 0July
Years: 0 February 0 August
0 March 0 September
0 April 0 October
0 May 0 November
0 June 0 December
Select All Clear All

n
Days Hours
0 Weekend Start Hour: 00:00-00:59 -
0 Weekdays End Hour: 23:00-23:59 -r
Select All ] Clear All Select All j Clear All



Stop execution of active RunSpec
       This panel is divided into five sections with boxes, buttons, or drop-down menus in each,
allowing the user to select specific aggregation levels, years, months, days, and hours. These
panel sections are used to define the time period for which emissions will be modeled in the
RunSpec.  In the screenshot depicted above, the user has specified that the RunSpec should
calculate emissions for the two hours from 10 am to noon on a typical January weekday in the
year 2000. The emissions for each hour will be calculated separately.
Page 18
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

2.2.3.1 Time Aggregation Level

       Click in the Time Aggregation Level section to set the level of pre-aggregation that is
desired. Only one choice can be selected. The default level is Hour and implies no pre-
aggregation of the MOVES data by time. If the user chooses a longer aggregation level time
period such as Year, Month, or Day, the model will pre-aggregate (i.e., compute a weighted
average of) all underlying MOVES internal data that are differentiated by hour (e.g.,
temperatures, VMT distributions, etc) prior to execution of the run. For example, if the user
chooses Month, the model will average the temperatures of all selected days and hours into an
average Month set (it may be a set because the temperatures will not necessarily be averaged by
geography unless that has also been pre-aggregated), and perform the simulation with these
average values.  Pre-aggregation sacrifices precision to improve model run time.

 ^ Note Once the user has selected a higher aggregation level than Hour, the model's GUI will
        automatically fill in the required lower GUI inputs. For example, if the user selects the
        Month button in the Time Aggregation Level panel, the model will fill in all of the
        hours and days input.  After the initial automatic selection, the user may de-select
        particular hours, days, or months. If such a de-selection is done, the user will end up
        with results that are based on aggregations that do not include de-selected hours, days,
        or months. For example,  if the user selects Months in the Time Aggregation Level
        panel and de-selects Weekends, the final emission result will represent a monthly
        aggregation that includes  Weekdays only.

 ^ Note The proper levels of time  aggregation for SIP and conformity analysis have been
        addressed in guidance documents.

XCaution!  Because of non-linearity in the general MOVES algorithm, differences may arise
            between aggregated results and non-aggregated results. For example,  the emission
            results from a run where all 24 hours are selected and the  Time Aggregation Level
            is set to Hour may not match the results from a run where the Time Aggregation
            Level is set to Day.

2.2.3.2 Years

       Select a calendar year(s) in  the Years section and click on the Add button.  Select a year
by clicking the black triangle to see a drop-down list of calendar years  and select an individual
year.  Click on Add to have that year appear in the Year selection pane.  This can be repeated to
select as many years as desired if National Domain/Scale has been chosen.  However, if
County or Project Domain/Scale  was chosen on the Scale panel, only 1 year can be selected in
the Year pane. Use the Remove button to deselect years.

             At least one calendar year must appear in the Years Selection panel  to obtain a
valid Time Spans input.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                      Page 19

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

2.2.3.3 Months

       Click one or more individual months to model to select the appropriate boxes in the
Months section. At least one Month box must be selected. Click the Select All button to select
all of the months.  Similarly, the Clear All button removes all of the previously chosen months.

 ^ Note If the Project Domain/Scale is selected, the RunSpec may cover only a single month.

2.2.3.4 Days

       Click one or more kinds of days of the week to model to select the appropriate boxes in
the Days section.  At least one kind of Day box must be selected. Click Select All button to
select all of the days. Similarly, the Clear All button removes all of the previously chosen day
types.

 ^ Note If the Project Domain/Scale is selected, the RunSpec may cover only a single type of
        day.

2.2.3.5 Hours

       The default time resolution for MOVES at both National and County Domain/Scale is
hourly, with hours expressed in military time ranging from midnight - 12:59 am (expressed as
00:00-00:59) to 11 pm - 11:59 pm (23:00 - 23:59). Use the drop down menu to select the
appropriate Start and End hours from the list.  Click the Select All button to select all of the
hours of the day.  Similarly, the Clear All button removes all of the previously selected hours of
the day.

     The times selected are relative to the time zone so that 7:00 to 9:59 AM is 7:00 to 9:59 AM
     in each selected county-state combination.

     If only one hour of output is desired, select the same entry for start time and end time (i.e.,
     0-0:59 and 0-0:59). This will produce one hour of output.

 ^ Note The hours selected are run for all chosen days, so it is not possible, for example, to
        model only from 11:00 PM on Friday to 01:59 AM on Saturday.  It is also not possible
        to run the model for a group of months that span a year end. That is, the user cannot
        run the model for just December of 2003 through January 2004. However, the model
        can be run multiple times with different RunSpec time spans to accomplish these tasks,
        or it can  be run for multiple days or years and then manually post-processed to
        eliminate the un-needed times.

2.2.4 Geographic Bounds

       Selecting Geographic Bounds allows the user to define the region to model.  The
options available on this panel depend on the choice of Domain/Scale and Calculation Type
(see Scale - Section 2.2.2). If the user has chosen Inventory calculations at the National scale,
the following screen will appear:

Page 20                                               United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                             March 2012
     B MOVES -C:\EPA\MOVESTestSuite\Runspecs\MOVES2010b.mrs -ID 189389588378876076
     File Edit Preprocessing Action Postprocessing Tools Settings Help
                              Region:
                              O Nation

                              O State

                              8 County

                              O Zone & Link

                              O Custom Domain
                                         States:
ALABAMA
ALASKA
ARIZONA
ARKANSAS
CALIFORNIA
COLORADO
CONNECTICUT
DELAWARE
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
                                                                                             L
                                  Geographic Bounds Requirements
                              Please select a state and county.
                                            Caution: For SIP or regional conformity analyses, you must go back to the
                                           } Scale window and select "County" before specifying a county in this window.
                                            Caution: You have selected National scale with detail at the State or County level.
                                            MOVES will use the default national database with default state and local allocation
                                           t factors. These factors have not been verified against actual state or county level
                                            data and do not meet regulatory requirements for SIPs and conformity determinations.
      p execution of active RunSpec
Three buttons, Nation, State and County are normally available. Choose the one appropriate
for your desired run.

XCaution! Your choice of "Region" will impact your results. If you choose the Nation or
             State input options, the model will pre-aggregate (i.e., compute a weighted average
             of) all underlying data that is a function of geography (temperatures, road types,
             etc) and execute the "National" or "State" run as if it were a single county run.
             Thus, a run at "Nation"  or "State" level will be faster than a "County" level run for
             the same area, but it will be less accurate.

        For example, if you choose State and Michigan, the model will average the temperatures
of all Michigan counties into a single average set  (it will be a set because the temperatures will
not necessarily be averaged by time) and perform the simulation with these average values.  The
report "MOVES2004 Validation Results" includes a sensitivity analysis of different pre-
aggregation levels. An alternative method of computing a state simulation is to select County
Region and then selecting all the individual counties in the desired state.  If you choose this
option, no pre-aggregation will be done and the model will execute separate simulations for each
county in the particular state.  This option will likely produce a slightly different emission result
than if the geographic specific  data were first aggregated and  then used because of non-linear
calculations in some algorithms.

XCaution! Be advised that if an entire state or nation is run at the county level, execution times
             may be quite long.  For such runs, we generally recommend multiple-computer
             processing.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                           Page 21

-------
March 2012
                                              MOVES2010b User Guide
         Nation:  Choose Nation to run scenarios and compute emission inventory results for all
counties/parishes in the United States and Territories. The Nation button is generally chosen if
the user wishes to create a simple national U.S. emission inventory.
         Edit Preprocessing Action Postprocessing Tools  Settings  Help
            Vehicles.'Equipment

            Road Type

            Pollutants And Processes

            Manage Input Data Sets

            Strategies
O State

O County

O Zone & Link

O Custom Domain
    Geographic Bounds Requirements
                                                 Caution: For SIP or regional conformity analyses, you must go back to the
                                                 Scale window and select "County" hefore specifying a county in this window
             Advanced Performance Features
        execution of active RunSpec
Page 22
                                 United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                                              March 2012
        State:  Choose State to run scenarios and compute emission inventories for particular
States or Territories within the United States. This panel has two parts (States and Selections)
and buttons for choosing the appropriate selections.
     B MOVES - C:\EPAWOVESTestSuite\Runspecs\MOVES2010b.mrs - ID 1 89389588378876076
     Bile Edit  Preprocessing  Action  Postprocessing lools Settings Help
O Custom Domain
          y  Vehicles Equipment

            Road Type

            Pollutants And Process

            Manage Input Data Sets

      [+|  y Strategies

       D    oinput

            Advanced Performance
                                             States:
ALABAMA
ALASKA
ARIZONA
ARKANSAS
CALIFORNIA
COLORADO
CONNECTICUT
DELAWARE
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
    Geographic Bounds Requirements
Please select a state.
               Caution: For SIP or regional conformity analyses, you must go back to the
               Scale window and select "County" before specifying a county in this window.
               Caution: You have selected National scale with detail at the State or County level.
               MOVES will use the default national database with default state and local allocation
               factors. These factors have not been verified against actual state or county level
               data and do not meet regulatory requirements for SIPs aird conformity determinations.
    •Stop execution of active RunSpec
        To choose the desired state(s):

                 1 .   Scroll to desired state in States box and click on it to highlight.  Click the
                     Add button under box. State will appear in the Selections box.

                 2.   Click the Select All button to choose all U.S.  states and territories available.
button.
        To remove a previously selected state, highlight it in Selections box and click the Delete
 ^ Note  The Add and Delete buttons are inactive if no states are highlighted.

        County: Choose County to run scenarios and compute emission inventories for specific
counties within a state.  If the County button is selected, a new bounds panel will show in the
Detail Panel.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                                           Page 23

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
• MOVES - C:\EPAWOVESTestSuite\Runspecs\MOVES2010b.mrs - ID 1 89389588378876076 | . ||H|f>f
File Edit Pre Processing Action Post Pro
Description
Scale
Time Spans
El Vehicles/Equipment
Road Type
Pollutants And Processes
Manage Input Data Sets
\+\ t Strategies
El / Output
Advanced Performance Features
[stop execution of active RunSpec
:essing Tools Settings Help
Region: states: Counties: Selections:
C Nation ALABAMA
ALASKA
81318 ARIZONA
CfiCoLintir ARKANSAS
CALIFORNIA
COLORADO
0 Custom Domain CONNECTICUT
DELAWARE
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA -

Select All 1 1
Geographic Bounds Requirements
Please select a state and county.
/\ Caution: For SIP or regional conformity analyses, you must go back to the
tlj Scale window and select "County" before specifying a county in this window.
Caution: You have selected National scale with detail at the State or County level.
/\ MOVES will use the default national database with default state and local allocation
^^J factors. These factors have not been verified against actual state or county level
data and do not meet regulatory requirements for SIPs and conformity determinations.

       The process for selecting a specific county is similar to selecting a state, outlined above.

       When using the County Domain/Scale and Inventory calculation type, the Region
portion of the Geographic Bounds detail panel indicates County by default, and the user must
specify the state and county in the manner detailed above.

       When using the Project Domain/Scale and Inventory calculation type, the Region
portion of the Geographic Bounds detail panel indicates County by default, and the user must
specify the state and county in the manner detailed earlier.

       When a user selects the Emission Rates calculation type on the Scale panel, the
Geographic Bounds panel allows a choice of Zone & Link at the  National scale, and Zone &
Link or Custom Domain at the County and Project scales

       When either the County or Project is chosen  on the Scale panel, the user can also define
a "custom county" by selecting the Custom Domain  option in the Region portion of the
Geographic Bounds panel, as shown in the screen shot below.
Page 24
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
  March 2012
• MOVES ID 8235028274129369176
File Edit Pre Processing Action Post Proces
Description
> Scale
Time Spans

\+\ Vehicles.tquipment
Road Type
Pollutants And Processes
Manage Input Data Sets


[+] J Output
Advanced Performance Features

toady..
BBS
sing lools Settings Help

! 0 Nation S**6101 "
County ID: [i 1-999, labels the county within a state.
Description:
GPA Fraction: 0.0 Fraction of county within a fuel Geographic Phase-in Area
O Zone & Link Bar. Pressure: inHg (avg. for low altitude is 28.9, avg. for high is 24.6)
(S) Custom Domain Vapor Adjust: [cTo 	 Refueling Vapor Program Adjustment Fraction
Spill Adjust: |p.O Refueling Spill Program Adjustment Fraction
The Project domain scale requires a database of detailed data.
Server: Refresh
Database: | ^ Enter£dit Data
Geographic Bounds Requirements
Please select a domain database.


       In this case, the user must provide a short county identifier (1-999) that will combine with
the state ID (99 for generic) to form the standard 5 digit county identifier used throughout
MOVES.  In addition, the user must provide a description and GPA (Geographic Phase-in Area)
fraction.  The Geographic Phase-in Area refers to a group of counties in the western U.S. that
had special gasoline sulfur requirements under Tier 2 regulations (see 65 Fed. Reg. 6755-6759
for details on the GPA).  The user must also provide the Barometric Pressure (in inches of
mercury, in Hg) and the Vapor and Spill Adjustment factors, which describe the Stage II
Refueling program in the area.

 ^ Note  Barometric Pressure must be indicated by the user for two reasons: 1) it is a required
         input for some MOVES calculations; and 2) the area is assigned a "Low" or "High"
         altitude depending on the user's input (areas with pressure less than or equal to 25.8403
         are high altitude;  areas with pressure greater than 25.8403 are low altitude).

!Tip   A user might want to use the Custom Domain option to represent an area that
       encompasses a portion of a county, multiple counties, or an area that crosses state
       boundaries (a nonattainment area may have these characteristics).

       When either the County or Project is chosen on the Scale panel, the Geographic
Bounds panel will contain an area in which to define the Domain Input Database for the
model, as shown in the following screenshot.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
Page 25

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
• MOVES - C:\EPA\MOVESTestSuite\RunspecsWOVES2010b.fnrs - ID 1 89389588378876076 fTlfEilfxl
File Edit Pre Processing Action Post Processing lools Settings Help
Description
Scale
Time Spans
1
%
\+\ t Vehiclestquipment
Road Type
Pollutants And Processes
Manage Input Data Sets
\+\ Strategies
[+] Output
Advanced Performance Feature
^^1

Region: states: Counties: Selections:
MICHIGAN ±1 MICHIGAN -Washtenaw County
MINNESOTA
MISSISSIPPI
® County MISSOURI
MONTANA
NEBRASKA
O Custom Domain NEVADA
NEW HAMPSHIRE
HEW JERSEY ~

Select All

The County domain scale requires a database of detailed data.
Server:
Database: » j | EnterlEdit Data Refresh
Geographic Bounds Requirements
Please select a domain database.

(stop execution or active RiinSpec
       For both the County and Custom Domain option, the user must specify the user-
supplied database that will contain county-specific data. For Project scale, a database of detailed
information on the project is required (see Data Managers (Importers) - Section 2.3.3.4). In
most cases, this database will be located on the server "localhost" (generally the user's own
machine). However, the user can specify a different host server in the Server box. After
specifying a server, identify a database to receive the data that will be imported. If a database
has already been created, it can be selected by clicking on the drop-down arrow adjacent to the
Database box and making a selection from the drop-down list. If the database has not been
created or if database changes must be made, click the Enter/Edit Data button to  open the
County Data Manager.

!Tip   Be sure to fill out all panels and fields to define the RunSpec before using the County
       Data Manager or Project Data Manager.  The selections in the RunSpec are used by
       the County Data Manager to define the data needed for the county data to be complete,
       and to filter the data used when creating export or template files.

XCaution!  Defaults that are exported from the MOVES database are generally not appropriate
            for SIP or conformity analyses. See MOVES Policy Guidance document for more
            information.

7 Note     A database created for a specific county by the County Data Manager can't be used
            as the Custom Domain Input database.

7 Note     If Custom Domain is  selected, the County Data Manager will not  export any
            default data; therefore,  the required information is necessary to use this option.
Page 26
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                               March 2012
        The user can clear the selected database and update the list of available databases by
clicking the Refresh button.

        The Geographic Bounds panel includes the text box, Geographic Bounds
Requirements, which defines what is expected of the user on the panel.

2.2.5 Vehicles/Equipment

        To select which on-road vehicles are to be modeled, click on Vehicles/Equipment in the
Navigation Panel.  This will open the On Road Vehicle Equipment Detail Panel.  Two lists
(Fuels and Source Use Types) appear to the left of this panel to allow distinct selections for the
vehicles/equipment.
     B MOVES - C:\EPA\MOVESTestSuite\RunspecsWOVES2010b.mrs - ID 189389588378876076
     File Edit Pre Processing Action Post Processing lools Settings Help
           Road Type

           Pollutants And Processes

           Manage Input Data Sets

      0    Strategies

      \+\    Output

           Advanced Performance Feat
                            Fuels:
                                                 Source Use Types:
                            Compressed Natural Gas (CNG)
                            Diesel Fuel
                            Electricity
                            Gasoline
                            Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG)
                            placeholder Fuel Type
       Combination Long-haul Truck
       Combination Short-haul Truck
       Intercity Bus
       Light Commercial Truck
       Motor Home
       Motorcycle
       Passenger Car
       Passenger Truck
       Refuse Truck
       School Bus
       Single Unit Long haul Truck
       Single Unit Short-haul Truck
       Transit Bus
Add Fuel Type Combinations
                               On Rond Vehicle Equipment Requirements
                            3lease select a Fuel and Source Use Type combination.
     Stop execution of active FtunSpec
    1.  Click and highlight the Fuels choice or click the Select All button to choose all the
        choices.

    2.  Click and highlight the Source Use Types choice or click the Select All button to choose
        all the choices.

    3.  Click Add Fuel/Type Combinations button to move the selected choices to the
        Selections box

To clear highlighted selections from Selections box, click Delete.

 7 Note  No default selection will appear on this panel, and the model cannot be run without a
          selection made.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                            Page 27

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

 7 Note   The On Road Vehicle Equipment panel contains a small subpanel at the bottom that
         reminds the user that they are required to select a Fuel and Source Use type. This panel
         disappears after a valid Fuel and Source Use Type selection is made.  If a selected
         combination is not in the database, the subpanel will notify the user that the
         combination is invalid (e.g. "Diesel fuel/Motorcycle combination is not in the
         database"). These non-existent combinations do not need to be removed from the
         RunSpec, but no results are reported for such vehicles.

 7 Note   Source use type is a combination of body style and how the vehicle is used.  For
         example, long haul and short haul trucks will tend to be very similar in size and design,
         but the way they are used defines their source use type. However, the use of the vehicle
         can affect the types of vehicles in the classification. For example, light commercial
         trucks would include panel vans (without windows) that would not normally appear in
         the passenger truck category, even though both vehicles are four tire trucks.

         Since the size  and design of some categories are similar, their emission impacts will
         also be similar. This makes it less critical that you be able to discern the differences
         between long and short haul trucks, as long as you have accurate estimates for total
         populations and vehicle activity for that general classification of truck.

         One exception to that thinking is long haul combination trucks.  These trucks are
         subject to federal rules about rest periods and MOVES estimates how long these
         vehicles are stopped and idling during rest periods. This extra idling can be a
         significant contribution to vehicle emissions.
Page 28                                                United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
  March 2012
Below are the Source Use Types and their descriptions:
Source Type
ID
11
21
31
32
41
42
43
51
52
53
54
61
62
Source Use Type
Motorcycle
Passenger Car
Passenger Truck
Light Commercial Truck
Intercity Bus
Transit Bus
School Bus
Refuse Truck
Single Unit Short-haul Truck
Single Unit Long-haul Truck
Motor Home
Combination Short-haul Truck
Combination Long-haul Truck
Description
Vehicles with less than four wheels.
Four wheel, two axle vehicles whose primary function is passenger
transport.
Four wheel, two axle trucks whose primary functional design is for
cargo, but are used primarily for passenger transport.
Four wheel, two axle trucks used primarily for cargo transport.
Passenger vehicles with a capacity of 15 or more persons primarily
used for transport between cities.
Passenger vehicles with a capacity of 15 or more persons primarily
used for transport within cities.
Passenger vehicles with a capacity of 15 or more persons used
primarily for transport of students for school.
Trucks primarily used to haul refuse to a central location.
Single unit trucks with more than four tires with a range of operation of
up to 200 miles.
Single unit trucks with more than four tires with a range of operation of
over 200 miles.
Trucks whose primary functional design is to provide sleeping quarters.
Combination tractor/trailer trucks with more than four tires with a
range of operation of up to 200 miles.
Combination tractor/trailer trucks with more than four tires with a
range of operation of over 200 miles.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
Page 29

-------
March 2012
                            MOVES2010b User Guide
2.2.6 Road Type

       If any vehicle has been selected (see Vehicles/Equipment - Section 2.2.5), the Road
Type panel becomes available on the Navigation Panel, allowing the selection of road type. All
Road Type panel controls are disabled otherwise.
      Preprocessing Action  Postprocessing lools Settings Help

      Descriptioi

      Scale

      Time Spans

      Geographic Bounds

      Vehicles/Equipment

         On Road Vehicle Equipment
Off-Network
 .rral Restricted Access
Rural Unrestricted Access
Urban Restricted Access
Urban Unrestricted Access
  p execution of active RunSpec
!Tip     You must select at least one road type.

    1.  Click and highlight the desired Road Types from the list.
    2.  Click the Select All button to select all Road Types in list.
    3.  Click the Add button to move choice to the Selected Road Types box.

Click the Delete button to clear the highlighted selections.

 7 Note  The list of Road Types is the complete list of roadway types present in the underlying
         MOVES database.  The default database has Road Types that represent urban and rural
         driving on roads with restricted and unrestricted vehicle access.  Restricted access
         roadtypes are usually used to model freeways and interstates; ramps are considered part
         of restricted access roadtypes.  The Ramp Fraction tab of the CDM (see Data
         Managers (Importers) - Section 2.3.3.4) will only become available if an unrestricted
         road type (i.e. 2 or 4) is selected.

 7 Note  Off Network is automatically selected when start or extended idle processes are
         selected on the Pollutants  and Processes panel.  All Road Types are automatically
         selected when any evaporative or refueling processes are selected on the Pollutants
         and Processes panel.
Page 30
                 United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
  March 2012
!Tip  All Road Types in an area on which VMT is allocated should be selected to correctly
      calculate population.

XCaution! Selected Road Types may or may not exist in the geographic bounds of the
            RunSpec. For example, a county may have no urban roads. MOVES will display
            results only for road types that exist in the selected geographic area.

2.2.7 Pollutants and Processes

       To select the pollutants and processes to include in the RunSpec, choose Pollutants and
Processes on the Navigation Panel. A matrix will appear in the Detail Panel, with Pollutants
listed as rows and Processes listed as columns.  When a pollutant/process combination is
selected by clicking a check box, it is included in the RunSpec. When the RunSpec is run, the
model will  compute emissions for that pollutant/process combination.
    File Edit Pre Processing Action Post Processing Tools Settings Help
Description
Scale
Time Spans
Geographic Bounds
El Vehicles/Equipment
Manage Input Data Sei
El Strategies
On-Road Retrofit
RateOfProgres'
\+\ / Output
Advanced Performanc

~~| Total Gaseous Hydrocarbons
Non-Methane Hydrocarbon;,
Neil-Methane Of came Case;
Total Organic Gases
Volatile urqanic compounds
Carbon Monoxide (CO)
* Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)
Ammonia (NH3)
Nitrogen Oxide (NO)
Nitrogen Dioxide (N02)
Nitrous Acid (MONO)
~| Sulfur Dioxide (302)
Primary Ed-isustPM-IQ -Total
Primary PM1 0 - Oiciann; Carbon
J Primary PM10- Elemental Carbon
PrimsnfFMIO-SiiliEite Participate
Primary PM 10- BrakewearParticulate
Primary PM1 0 - Tirewear Participate
Primary Exhaust PM2.5 - Total
P"1rr'arvaM2.5- Organic Carbon
P-irrary --M2.5 - Elemental Carbon
Primary PM2 5 - Sulfate Partieulate
PrirTiatvF'1'.'O 5- Brak swear Particuldte
Total Eneray Consumption
D Petroleum Energy Consumption
Fossil Fuel Eneray Consumption
Brake Spec iflc Fuel C onsumption fESFC)
Methane (CH4)
l\ltrn,; Ovide(N20;i
.".tire spheric CO 2
Q C02 Equivalent
H Benzene
3 Ethan ol
MTBE
Naphthalene Particle
1,.3-Butadiene
Formaldehyde
Acetaldehyde
Acralein
Naphthalene gas

Running Exhaust


D
























g













































Start Exhaust
0
0
0
E
t
•
*




a
a
a
i
*
*
k
i




*


E
i
I



a

a
a
a

-
a
a
a
i
-
k
i
»•
t'
t'
k
'









Brakewear
















-





'.

















Tirewear

















0






















Evap Permeation


V1
tf
k


-
<































a
i
a





-

4| III




Evap Fuel VaporVenting


0
a
0




























a





-
Evap Fue Leaks
•
i'
E
E
1?




























-





'
Crankcase Running Exhi
0
0
0
0
0
tf
|
"
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
0


0
H
0
0





0
0


"
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

l»


       There is no limit to the number of boxes that may be checked; however, at least one box
must be checked to produce a valid MOVES RunSpec input.

 ^ Note  It may be necessary to scroll the Pollutants and Processes panel to see all of the
         Process columns or Pollutant rows.

 ^ Note  Checking the box on the left side of the panel will select all of the processes for that
         pollutant. The box on the left side of the panel will also show a check if any process is
United States Environmental Protection Agency
Page 31

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

       selected.  Additionally, unchecking the box on the left side of the panel will deselect all
         processes for that pollutant.

 ^ Note  In order to compare results to MOBIL6.2 runs, all processes except extended idle need
         to be selected.

XCaution! Users are cautioned that the number of check boxes selected will affect execution
            time.  Large runs calculating many pollutant/process combinations may require
            processing times of several hours, so users are advised to begin with only a few
            pollutant/process combinations.

       A Pollutant/Process Requirements box is included at the bottom of the Detail Panel.
Text in this box actively responds to pollutant/process combination selections made in the
matrix. In some cases,  a specific pollutant/process calculation depends upon another
pollutant/process calculation, and the user must select the base pollutant/process combination in
order to be able to select the dependent combination. An error message will appear in the
Pollutant/Process Requirements box should the user not select the base combination. Not all
Processes apply to all Pollutants; therefore the matrix above is sparse. The following table
displays the complete list allowable Pollutant - Process combinations allowable where 'X'
checkmarks are displayed.
Page 32                                                United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012



Total Gaseous
Hydrocarbons
Non-Methane
Hydrocarbons
Non-Methane
Organic Gases
Total Organic
Gases
Volatile
Organic
Compounds
Carbon
Monoxide (CO)
Oxides of
Nitrogen (NOx)
Ammonia
(NH3)
Nitrogen Oxide
(NO)
Nitrogen
Dioxide (NO2)
Nitrous Acid
(HONO)
Sulfur Dioxide
(S02)
Primary
Exhaust PM10
-Total
Primary PM10-
Organic Carbon

Running
Exhaust

X

X

X

X


X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


X

X


Start Exhaust

X

X

X

X


X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


X

X


Brakewear
































Tirewear































Evap
Permeation

X

X

X

X


X



















Evap
Fuel
Vapor
Venting

X

X

X

X


X




















Evap
Fuel
Leaks

X

X

X

X


X




















Crankcase
Running
Exhaust

X

X

X

X


X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


X

X

Crankcase
Start
Exhaust

X

X

X

X


X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


X

X
Crankcase
Extended
Idle
Exhaust

X

X

X

X


X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


X

X

Refueling
Displacement
Vapor Loss

X

X

X

X


X




















Refueling
Spillage
Loss

X

X

X

X


X




















Extended
Idle
Exhaust

X

X

X

X


X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


X

X

Well-
To-
Pump






























United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 33

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide



Primary PM10-
Elemental
Carbon
Primary PM10-
Sulfate
Particulate
Primary PM10-
Brakewear
Particulate
Primary PM10-
Tirewear
Particulate
Primary
Exhaust PM2.5
-Total
Primary PM2.5
- Organic
Carbon
Primary PM2.5
- Elemental
Carbon
Primary PM2.5
- Sulfate
Particulate
Primary PM2.5
- Brakewear
Particulate
Primary PM2.5
-Tire wear
Particulate
Total Energy
Consumption

Running
Exhaust


X


X








X


X


X


X







X


Start Exhaust


X


X








X


X


X


X







X


Brakewear








X

















X







Tirewear











X

















X



Evap
Permeation
































Evap
Fuel
Vapor
Venting

































Evap
Fuel
Leaks

































Crankcase
Running
Exhaust


X


X








X


X


X


X









Crankcase
Start
Exhaust


X


X








X


X


X


X








Crankcase
Extended
Idle
Exhaust


X


X








X


X


X


X









Refueling
Displacement
Vapor Loss

































Refueling
Spillage
Loss

































Extended
Idle
Exhaust


X


X








X


X


X


X







X

Well-
To-
Pump
































Page 34
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012

Petroleum
Energy
Consumption
Fossil Fuel
Energy
Consumption
Brake Specific
Fuel
Consumption
(BSFC)
Methane (CH4)
Nitrous Oxide
(N2O)
Atmospheric
CO2
CO2 Equivalent
Benzene
Ethanol
MTBE
Naphthalene
particle
1,3- Butadiene
Formaldehyde
Acetaldehyde
Acrolein
Naphthalene
gas
Running
Exhaust
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Start Exhaust
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Brakewear
















Tirewear
















Evap
Permeation







X
X
X





X
Evap
Fuel
Vapor
Venting







X
X
X





X
Evap
Fuel
Leaks







X
X
X





X
Crankcase
Running
Exhaust



X
X


X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Crankcase
Start
Exhaust



X
X


X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Crankcase
Extended
Idle
Exhaust



X



X


X
X
X
X
X
X
Refueling
Displacement
Vapor Loss



X



X
X
X





X
Refueling
Spillage
Loss



X



X
X
X





X
Extended
Idle
Exhaust
X
X

X

X
X
X


X
X
X
X
X
X
Well-
To-
Pump
















United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 35

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

2.2.7.1 Processes

       In MOVES, "Process" refers to the mechanism by which emissions are created. Engine
operation creates Running Emissions Exhaust, Start Emissions Exhaust (the addition to running
emissions caused by the engine start), and Extended Idle Emissions Exhaust (i.e., "hotelling"
emissions from a combination, long-haul truck). MOVES also distinguishes Crankcase Running
Exhaust, Crankcase Start Exhaust, and Crankcase Extended Idle Exhaust to describe the
exhaust gases that escape around the piston rings and enter the crankcase during normal operation.

       MOVES models evaporative emissions, situations in which unburned fuel escapes the
vehicle's  fuel system, through the Evap Fuel Vapor Venting, Evap Permeation, and Evap Fuel
Leaks processes.  In addition, vehicle refueling can cause Refueling Spillage Loss and Refueling
Displacement Vapor Loss.  Brakewear and Tirewear describe the non-exhaust particulate
emissions that result from brake use and tire wear.
       It's worthwhile to mention there are Process dependencies on other Processes or other
conditions that apply to all pollutants that share the process association. The first three
dependencies relate to the Time  Spans panel, suggesting that all hours must be selected to run the
process for any selected pollutant:

          •   Evap Permeation requires  all hours to be selected.

          •   Evap Fuel Vapor Venting  requires all hours to be selected.

          •   Evap Fuel Leaks  requires all hours to be selected.

The last three dependencies relate to other processes that need to be selected as a pre-requisite to
running the selected process for  the pollutant in question:

          •   Crankcase Running Exhaust  requires Running Exhaust 

          •   Crankcase Start Exhaust  requires Start Exhaust 

          •   Crankcase Extended Idle Exhaust  requires Extended  Idle Exhaust
              
2.2.7.2 Pollutants

       MOVES calculates emissions of criteria pollutants, greenhouse gases and selected air
toxics associated with motor vehicle operation. MOVES also calculates energy consumption. For
many pollutants, the emissions calculation is based on the prior calculation of another pollutant
emission.  As noted earlier, the Pollutant/Process Requirements box will display an error
message if the user selects a dependent pollutant but not the base pollutant.  Pollutants and base
pollutants are listed in the table below.
Page 36                                               United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
       The available processes and their processID numbers are listed below.
processID
1
2
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
90
99
processName
Running Exhaust
Start Exhaust
Brakewear
Tirewear
Evap Permeation
Evap Fuel Vapor Venting
Evap Fuel Leaks
Crankcase Running Exhaust
Crankcase Start Exhaust
Crankcase Extended Idle Exhaust
Refueling Displacement Vapor Loss
Refueling Spillage Loss
Extended Idle Exhaust
Well-to-Pump
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 37

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
Pollutant Name
1 Total Gaseous Hydrocarbons
2 Carbon Monoxide (CO)
3 Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)
5 Methane (CH4)
6 Nitrous Oxide (N2O)
20 Benzene
21 Ethanol
22 Methyl-t-butyl Ether (MTBE)
23 Naphthalene Particle
24 1,3-Butadiene
25 Formaldehyde
26 Acetaldehyde
27 Acrolein
30 Ammonia (NH3)
31 Sulfur Dioxide (SO2)
32 Nitrogen Oxide (NO)
33 Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2)
35 Nitrous Acid (MONO)
40 2,2,4-Trimethylpentane
41 Ethyl Benzene
42 Hexane
43 Propionaldehyde
44 Styrene
45 Toluene
46 Xylene
60 Mercury Elemental Gaseous
61 Mercury Divalent Gaseous
62 Mercury Particulate
63 Arsenic Compounds
64 Chromium 3+
65 Chromium 6+
Short Name
Total Gas HC
CO
NOx
CH4
N2O


MTBE
Naphthalene P

CH2O

C3H4O
NH3
SO2
NO
NO2
MONO

C8H10
C6H14










Parent



1 Total Gaseous Hydrocarbons

87 Volatile Organic Compounds
87 Volatile Organic Compounds
87 Volatile Organic Compounds
100 Primary Exhaust PM10 - Total
87 Volatile Organic Compounds
87 Volatile Organic Compounds
87 Volatile Organic Compounds
87 Volatile Organic Compounds

91 Total Energy Consumption
3 Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)
3 Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)
3 Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)













Child
5 Methane (CH4)
79 Non-Methane Hydrocarbons

32 Nitrogen Oxide (NO)
33 Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2)
35 Nitrous Acid (HONO)
86 Total Organic Gases



























Page 38
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
Pollutant Name
66 Manganese Compounds
67 Nickel Compounds
68 Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene particle
69 Fluoranthene particle
70 Acenaphthene particle
71 Acenaphthylene particle
72 Anthracene particle
73 Benz(a)anthracene particle
74 Benzo(a)pyrene particle
75 Benzo(b)fluoranthene particle
76 Benzo(g,h,i)perylene particle
77 Benzo(k)fluoranthene particle
78 Chrysene particle
79 Non-Methane Hydrocarbons
80 Non-Methane Organic Gases
81 Fluorene particle
82 lndeno(l,2,3,c,d)pyrene particle
83 Phenanthrene particle
84 Pyrene particle
86 Total Organic Gases
87 Volatile Organic Compounds
90 Atmospheric CO2
Short Name













Non-Methane
Hydrocarbons
Non-Methane
Organic Gases




TOG
VOC
Atmos CO2
Parent













1 Total Gaseous Hydrocarbons
79 Non-Methane Hydrocarbons




5 Methane (CH4)
80 Non-Methane Organic Gases
79 Non-Methane Hydrocarbons
91 Total Energy Consumption
Child













80 Non-Methane Organic Gases
87 Volatile-Organic-Compounds
86 Total Organic Gases





20 Benzene
21 Ethanol
22 MTBE
24 1,3-Butadiene
25 Formaldehyde
26 Acetaldehyde
27 Acrolein
185 Naphthalene gas
98 CO2 Equivalent
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 39

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
Pollutant Name
91 Total Energy Consumption
92 Petroleum Energy Consumption
93 Fossil Fuel Energy Consumption
98 CO2 Equivalent
99 Brake Specific Fuel Consumption (BSFC)
100 Primary Exhaust PM10 -Total
101 Primary PM10- Organic Carbon
102 Primary PM10 - Elemental Carbon
105 Primary PM10 - Sulfate Particulate
106 Primary PM10 - Brakewear Particulate
107 Primary PM10 - Tirewear Particulate
110 Primary Exhaust PM2.5 - Total
111 Primary PM2. 5 -Organic Carbon
112 Primary PM2. 5- Elemental Carbon
115 Primary PM2.5 - Sulfate Particulate
116 Primary PM2.5 - Brakewear Particulate
Short Name
Total Energy
Petrol Energy
Fossil Energy
CO2 Equivalent
BSFC
PM10- Total Exh
PM10- Organic C
PMlO-ElemC
PM10- Sulfate
PM10-
Brakewear
PM10- Tirewear
PM2.5- Total Exh
PM2. 5 - Organic
C
PM2.5 - Elem C
PM2.5 - Sulfate
PM2.5Brakewear
Parent

91 Total Energy Consumption
91 Total Energy Consumption
90 Atmospheric CO2

101 Primary PM10 - Organic
Carbon
102 Primary PM10- Elemental
Carbon
105 Primary PM10 - Sulfate
Particulate


91 Total Energy Consumption
116 Primary PM2.5 - Brakewear
Particulate
117 Primary PM2. 5 -Tirewear
Particulate
111 Primary PM2. 5 - Organic
Carbon
112 Primary PM2. 5 - Elemental
Carbon
115 Primary PM2. 5 - Sulfate
Particulate


91 Total Energy Consumption

Child
31 Sulfur Dioxide (SO2)
90 Atmospheric CO2
92 Petroleum Energy Consumption
93 Fossil Fuel Energy Consumption
105 Primary PM10 - Sulfate Particulate
115 Primary PM2.5 - Sulfate Particulate




23 Naphthalene particle
100 Primary Exhaust PM10 - Total
100 Primary Exhaust PM10 - Total
100 Primary Exhaust PM10 - Total



110 Primary Exhaust PM2. 5 - Total
110 Primary Exhaust PM2. 5 - Total
110 Primary Exhaust PM2. 5 - Total
106 Primary PM10 - Brakewear Particulate
Page 40
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
Pollutant Name
117 Primary PM2.5 - Tirewear Particulate
130 1,2,3,7,8,9-Hexachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin
131 Octachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin
132 1,2,3,4,6,7,8-Heptachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin
133 Octachlorodibenzofuran
134 1,2,3,4,7,8-Hexachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin
135 1,2,3,7,8-Pentachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin
136 2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzofuran
137 1,2,3,4,7,8,9-Heptachlorodibenzofuran
138 2,3,4,7,8-Pentachlorodibenzofuran
139 1,2,3,7,8-Pentachlorodibenzofuran
140 1,2,3,6,7,8-Hexachlorodibenzofuran
141 1,2,3,6,7,8-Hexachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin
142 2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin
143 2,3,4,6,7,8-Hexachlorodibenzofuran
144 1,2,3,4,6,7,8-Heptachlorodibenzofuran
145 1,2,3,4,7,8-Hexachlorodibenzofuran
146 1,2,3,7,8,9-Hexachlorodibenzofuran
168 Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene gas
169 Fluoranthenegas
170 Acenaphthene gas
171 Acenaphthylenegas
172 Anthracene gas
173 Benz(a)anthracene gas
174 Benzo(a)pyrenegas
175 Benzo(b)fluoranthene gas
176 Benzo(g,h,i)perylenegas
177 Benzo(k)fluoranthene gas
178 Chrysene gas
181 Fluorenegas
182 lndeno(l,2,3,c,d)pyrene gas
183 Phenanthrenegas
184 Pyrene gas
185 Naphthalene gas
Short Name
PM2.5 - Tirewear

































Parent

































87 Volatile Organic
Compounds
Child
107 Primary PM10 - Tirewear Particulate

































United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 41

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
2.2.8 Manage Input Data Sets

       In general, the County Domain Manager and the Project Data Manager are used to enter
data. However, you may select Manage Input Data Sets on the Navigation Panel to specify
specialized user-supplied data to be read by the model during execution.  Databases entered using
this feature will overlay existing databases tables (or portions of a table, if a table containing only a
subset of records is provided) in the MOVES default database tables, if they exist. No default
selections exist for this panel and the model can be run without any selections on this panel.
          MOVES - C:\EPA\MOVESTastSuita\Ru
                                    - ID 8986098163302437300
                               Tools Settings Help
                                   Server:
                                   Description: Q
                                                   Create Database...
                                                              Move Up   Move Down
        Stop execution of actrve RunSpec
 9 Note Each database added through this feature can consist of one or more MOVES input
        database tables.

 ^ Note These databases must adhere to the MOVES schema and use the database management
        system (DBMS) used by MOVES. In practice this means that individual tables in the
        user-supplied database must have identical names as the MOVES default input database
        and the individual fields in the tables must have identical lengths and types as MOVES
        default tables. For details regarding the MOVES database schema see the Software
        Design Reference Manual.

!Tip The data in user input databases take priority over data from the MOVES default database.

 ^ Note Entries in the Manage Input Data Sets panel are used in the run, but will not change the
        values in the MOVES default database.

   To create a new database with empty tables of the proper schema on an existing local or remote
server, type the server and a new database name and click the Create Database button.  Leaving
the server box blank creates the new database on the localhost server.
Page 42
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
   You can use database tools outside of MOVES, such as MySQL, to populate new database
tables with alternate values. Within MOVES, the Data Importer, County Data Manager, and
Project Data Manager also aid in creating and populating User Input databases (see Data
Manager (Importers) - Section 2.3.3.4)

!Tip Databases created with the County Data Manager or Project Data Manager are selected
     in the Domain Input Database pane of the Geographic Bounds panel rather than the
     Manage Input Data Sets panel.

To choose a database, select it from the dropdown list, and click the Add button to add the new or
existing database to the input databases, shown in the Selections window.  MOVES will first
validate that the combination of server and database are unique within the selections.  The same
server-database combination cannot be added more than once.  Click the Move Up or Move Down
buttons to modify the order in which a particular database  selection is used.  To remove a database,
highlight it and click the Delete button.

!Tip The order in which these databases are applied to the default data is important. If two or
     more alternate databases are specified in the Selections list, the one that appears last in the
     list will  replace any previous ones in  cases where the internal tables and records of each
     database overlap.
2.2.9 Creating and Using Internal Control Strategies

                               In MOVES, "Strategies" are sets of parameters that replace
                        MOVES defaults, and thus allow modeling of different future scenarios.
                        The On-Road Retrofit strategy allows you to enter information about
                        diesel trucks and buses that have been retrofitted with emission control
                        equipment. The use of control strategies is optional; if you do not select
                        any strategy, the RunSpec will use data from the MOVES default
                        database.

                               The selection of the strategy opens a split panel on the screen.
                        The left side of the panel is called the Strategies Management panel
                        (see screen shot on left), and contains buttons that enable the user to
                        add, import, export, delete, and check data. Detailed information
                        specific to the strategy appears to the right, on the Strategies Detail
                        panel.

       The buttons on the Strategies Management panel are used to manipulate the strategy data
sets, or "objects", needed for each RunSpec, as explained below.

XCaution! A RunSpec may have only  one On-Road Retrofit strategy. The New button cannot
            be selected without first clicking Delete to remove any existing loaded object.  If a

       strategy data set is already loaded and the user imports a new file, the import action will
            overwrite the existing data set.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 43

-------
March 2012
                                                          MOVES2010b User Guide
2.2.9.1 Adding Strategy Files

       Users can add new strategy data to a RunSpec by clicking the New button or the Import
button.

       Clicking the New button creates a new strategy data set, which is added to the RunSpec.
The new strategy data appears on the list of Loaded Objects as (default).  However, in MOVES,
the Loaded Objects window does not function as intended and should be ignored.

       Clicking the Import button allows you to import an appropriate input file. The On Road
Retrofit Strategy allows you to import XML, tab-delimited text, and Microsoft Excel files.  The
On-Road Retrofit Strategy allows you to import Microsoft Excel (.xls), tab-delimited text files,  or
comma-delimited text. Typically, the import file is created by exporting a template file, editing it
in a spreadsheet, saving the edited version as a tab-delimited text file, and importing this text file.
        B MOVES - C:\EPA\MOVESTestSuite\Runspecs\MOVES2010b.nrrs - ID 8986098163302437300
        File Edit Preprocessing Action Postprocessing Tools Settings Help

             Description

             Scale

             Time Spans

             Geographic Bounds

         El   Veliiclestqulpinent

             Road Type

             Pollutants And Processes

             Manage Input Data Sets

             Strategies
B
2.2.9.2 Deleting Strategy Files

       You may delete a strategy data set from the RunSpec by clicking the Delete button.
MOVES will prompt for confirmation before actually removing the data set.
Page 44
                                                United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
2.2.9.3 Exporting Strategy Files

       The Export button allows you to write strategy parameter sets to file for storage.  When
you click Export, a standard Windows file browser appears from which you can name a file to
which to write the data as tab-delimited text.

       To create a template file for the On-Road Retrofit strategies, choose New, and then export a
file containing only headers. The On-Road Retrofit Strategy allows you to export previously
imported files.

2.2.9.4 Naming Strategy Files

       By clicking the Description button, the dialog box shown below is displayed:
                Edit Description
                Description:
                                                                  OK
                | (default)
                                                                 Cancel
       Changing the description will change the text shown in the Loaded Objects window.
However, importing different files will not change the description.

!Tip The Description text can be misleading since it must be manually updated if new strategy
     files are loaded.  You may wish to leave it blank.

2.2.9.5 Saving and Transferring Strategy Files

       Strategies may exist inside and outside of a RunSpec, that is, the parameters can be saved
as part of a RunSpec and/or as a separate file that can be re-used from one RunSpec to the next.
This feature can help create a set of RunSpecs that use a consistent set of strategy settings.  The
Import and Export buttons allow for the transfer of strategy data between RunSpecs.

       Using the File menu to save and open RunSpecs automatically saves and loads the
Strategies embedded  within the RunSpecs. The files containing the strategies do not need to be
imported separately. However, the version of the file embedded within the RunSpec  is set at the
time of the import; in  other words, if any change are made to the strategy file outside of MOVES,
the file must again be  imported for the RunSpec to reflect the changes made.

2.2.9.6 AVFT Strategy Conversion

       In MOVES2010B, the AVFT Strategy GUI has been removed for all new RunSpecs and
for all old RunSpecs that have no AVFT Strategy. However, for purposes of backward
compatibility, an option box is displayed on the AVFT Strategy GUI when an old RunSpec is
loaded that contains an AVFT Strategy. The resulting panel only permits the AVFT data to be
exported to a user supplied database, and the AVFT Strategy to be deleted from the RunSpec.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 45

-------
March 2012
           MOVES2010b User Guide
       Specific instructions on the use of the converter and the resulting database are given on the
GUI. Old RunSpecs that contain an AVFT strategy cannot be executed by MOVES. Old
RunSpecs that do not contain an AVFT strategy are unaffected.  Since this feature has now been
deprecated, you must enter all AVFT data (fuel distributions) in the new Fuel Type and
Technology Importer (see Fueltype and Technologies - Section 2.3.3.4.9).
     H MOVES Data Importer
      Source Type Population  Vehicle Type VMT  liM Programs  [ Generic | Tools
          FueHype and Technologies
                               I ,i Fuel
                                         Meteorology Data
                                                          Ramp Fraction
                                                                         Road Type Distribution
           RunSpec Summary
                               Database
                                              Age Distribution
                                                                   Average Speed Distribution
      )escription of Imported Data:
      Mr Data Source:

      ilo: (please select a file)
                                                                                Browse...
                                                               Clear Imported Data    Create Template...
                                                                              Import
      l/lessages:
       Export Default Data
                                                         Export Imported Data
                                                            Fueltype and Technologies
                                                                                      Done
2.2.9.7 Managing On-Road Vehicle Retrofit Data

       MOVES has the capability to model on-road vehicle retrofit strategies for all exhaust
pollutants for diesel trucks and buses. Appendix D - Creating an On-Road Retrofit Input File
provides detailed instructions for creating an On-Road Retrofit data file.
       To add on-road vehicle retrofit data, the user should click the  On-Road Retrofit option
under Strategies on the Navigation Panel.  This will open the On-Road Retrofit panel, which
displays the Strategies Management Panel on the left side of the panel as described earlier in the
Strategies section. The Description, New, Export, Delete, and Check buttons work as described
earlier.
 ^ Note  The Retrofit Strategy only works for non-passenger diesel trucks and buses.  Importing a
         strategy for motorcycles, cars, passenger trucks or for other fuel types will generate an
         error.
Page 46
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
     B MOVES - C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\MOVES2010b.
     File Edit Pre Processing  Action  Post Processing Tools Settings Help

                           *  Loaded objects:
                                     -ID 6521840346990767913
                                                    -Road Vehicle Retrofit
                                                   Use the "Import..." button to select a retofit parameter file.
2.2.9.8 Importing Retrofit Data

       When you click on On-Road Retrofit, the Detail Panel to the right of the Strategies
Management Panel instructs you to click the New button first and then click the Import button to
select a retrofit parameter file.  The Import button enables you to import On-Road Retrofit data as
a tab delimited, comma separated (.csv), or .xls file. When you click on Import, a standard
Windows file browser window appears from which you can select the file. If an .xls file is
imported, MOVES will prompt you to specify  a worksheet from which the data should be
imported

       Once data are imported, the display in the Detail Panel will  show the name and location of
the imported file ("Data Source").  A Reload button that will also appear next to the file name can
be clicked on to capture any changes to the imported data file.

       Importing retrofit data automatically saves the data to the RunSpec, but it does not
automatically apply the retrofit parameters to the emission results that MOVES produces. To
apply the retrofit parameters to the emission results, check the Use the On-Road Retrofit Settings
box that appears at the top of the On-Road Retrofit panel. This allows you to turn retrofit on and
off without reloading the files.

XCAUTION! If you do not select Use the On-Road Retrofit Settings, the retrofit inputs will not
             be used.

       If there are any data format or consistency issues in a file you're trying to import (e.g.,
incorrect number of columns or data that are inconsistent with what you selected elsewhere in the
MOVES GUI), a message(s) will appear in the Messages window at the bottom of the panel.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 47

-------
March 2012
           MOVES2010b User Guide
Importing data for retrofits requires that you enter the description of the field (e.g. NOX rather
than pollutant 3).
2.2.9.9 Rate of Progress Calculation

       The Rate-of-Progress Calculation strategy supports users modeling vehicle emissions for
Reasonable Further Progress SIP requirements.
        MOVES -C:\EPA\MOVESTestSuite\Runspecs\MOVES2010b.mrs - ID 7294082862927004028
             Advanced Performance Features
                                                                                      - n x
      File Edit  Preprocessing Action Postprocessing  Tools Settings Help
                                          G Compute Rate-of-Progress "No Clean Air Act Amendments" Emissions

                                         The Rate-of-Progress Calculation strategy supports users modeling vehicle
                                         emissions for Reasonable Further Progress SIP requirements. It models a
                                         "No Clean Air Act Amendments" scenario by assigning 1993 model year
                                         emission rates to all post-1993 vehicles.

                                         Seethe MOVES user guide and guidance documents for more details.
       If you select Compute Rate-of-Progress 'No Clean Air Act Amendments' Emissions,
the MOVES model will assign 1993 model year emission rates to all post-1993 vehicles.

       Under the Clean Air Act, some State Implementation Plans (SIPs) must include a
demonstration that the state is making "reasonable further progress" in reducing hydrocarbon and
NOx emissions.  To compute the rate of progress to this goal, the Act requires calculating
emissions with and without the impact of the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990. To perform the
highway vehicle portion of these calculations with MOVES, you should use the Rate of Progress
feature.  You should also set inspection maintenance programs and fuel programs to appropriate
parameters.  For more information, see MOVES Technical Guidance.
Page 48
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                                                         March 2012
2.2.10 Output

        Selecting Output on the Navigation Panel expands to show General Output and Output
Emissions Detail. Each of these panels allows you to specify aspects of the output data.

2.2.10.1 Specifying Database, Time Period, and Units in Output

        Click on the General Output panel to specify the output database, the units, and the
activity types reported. The panel has three sub-panels:  Output Database, Units, and Activity.
      H MOVES - C:\EPA\MOVESTestSuite\Runspecs\MOVES2010b.mrs - ID 7294082862927004028
      Hie Edit
             Preprocessing Action Postprocessing lools  Settings Help

             Description

             Scale

             Time Spans
       B
       B
       B
 Geographic Bounds


 Vehicles/Equipment


 Road Type


 Pollutants And Processes


 Ma Read, I"" L''1'*1 Sets


 Strategies


    On-Road Retrofit


    Rate Of Progress


 Output


^^^Bg|||jMJ|M|||U||^l

    Output Emissions Detail


 Advanced Performance Features
                                        Output Database
                                         Server:
                                                                            Refresh
                                         Database: movestestresults
                                                                        T   Create Database..
Units

  Mass Units:

  Energy Units:

  Distance Units:
                                                    Grams   •*•
                                                    Joules    T
                                                    Miles
Activity

   0 Distance Traveled

   D Source Hours

   D Source Hours Idling

   G Source Hours Operating

   D Source Hours Parked

   D Population

   D Starts
      oad File:
2.2.10.1.1 Output Database

        The first box, Output Database, contains input boxes for the server name and the output
database name.  A blank server box is the default and it indicates that the localhost (the MySQL
data folder located on your computer) is to be used. Most users should leave this blank.  The
second box contains the name of the MySQL output database where you desire the MOVES output
to be written.  You must select an existing MOVES output database or create a new MOVES
output database into which the results should be placed.  If the output database already exists and
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                                                                Page 49

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

contains rows within its output tables, a warning icon is displayed.  A new run of the MOVES
model will add its results to an existing MOVES output database, and automatically give them the
next available MOVES Run identification number.  MOVES output records in an existing output
database cannot be deleted or replaced from within the MOVES GUI.

       A user choosing to create a new MOVES output database must choose a unique name and
may click the "Create Database" button. All new output databases begin with a MOVES Run
identification number of one.

XCaution!  Never attempt to create a new output database with the same name as the MOVES
            default database or of any user-supplied MOVES input databases.

     The output database should follow a naming convention to differentiate it from other
     databases; typically, using "_out" at the end of the database name is recommended.

2.2.10.1.2 Units

       The Units  box contains choices for the mass, energy, and distance units in which the results
will be reported. The choices for mass are kilograms, grams, pounds, or US tons (short tons).  The
available energy units are Joules, Kilojoules, or Million BTUs (British Thermal Units). The
available distance units are miles or kilometers. You may choose only one unit for each of the
three measurement types.  The units are reported in the output database in the MySQL output table
"movesrun."

      Make sure to choose units of the appropriate magnitude for your RunSpec. For instance, if
      the RunSpec is very narrow spatially, temporally, and in terms of vehicle and road types,
      then choosing Tons as the Mass Units may not give you the desired level of detail.

2.2.10.1.3 Activity

       The Activity panel allows you to choose which vehicle activity to report in the
Movesactivityoutput table.

       If Emission Rates is selected on the Scale panel, Distance Traveled and Population will
be selected automatically  since their values are needed for the rates calculations.

XCaution!   If the calculation type Emission Rates is selected on the Scale panel, the activity
             values will represent an intermediate step in the rates calculations rather than the
             real activity for that time and place. To reduce file size, use the Aggregation and
             Data Handling panel on the Advanced Performance Features screen to select
             Clear Movesactivityoutput after rate calculations.

^ NOTE In the movesactivityoutput table, population always has month,  day  & hour keys of zero
        (i.e. "doesn't matter") because population is assumed constant in time across an entire
        year.  This scheme reduces table size, but requires care when filtering results and when
        joining to other tables. Also, if you  assign some VMT to a road  type, but then do not
        select that road type in the RunSpec, the population will be lower than it should be.  This

Page 50                                               United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
         is because the missing VMT is not used when calculating population.  You should model
         all road types (where VMT is allocated) to ensure proper calculations.

 ^ NOTE Activity is generated only when at least one process that uses that activity is chosen on
         the Pollutants/Processes panel. If you choose an activity but do not choose the associated
         process, the Movesactivityoutput table will not include the desired results.

        The following table, Activity Types lists and describes the activities MOVES can output,
their units, and the processes that generate their information.
ActivityTypelD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Distance traveled
Source Hours (population
times the number of
hours)
Source Hours Idling
(the number of hours that
combination long haul
trucks spent in extended
idle mode)
Source Hours Operating
(the number of hours that
vehicles spent operating)
Source Hours Parked (the
number of hours that
vehicles were parked)
Population (the number
of vehicles — assumed
constant for each year)
Starts (the number of
engine starts)
Units
Distance units as set
in a RunSpec
Hours, regardless of
time unit
aggregation
Hours, regardless of
time unit
aggregation
Hours, regardless of
time unit
aggregation
Hours, regardless of
time unit
aggregation
SourceUseType
count
Number of starts
ProcessID
1
11,12,13
90
1,9, 10,11,12,13
11,12,13
1,2,9,10,11,12,13,90
2
Notes
Also needed for proper
calculation of evaporative
emissions when doing
"Rates" calculations

Off network roads only

Off network roads only

Off network roads only
2.2.10.2 Specifying Emission Distinctions in Output

       Select Output Emissions Detail on the Navigation Panel (after expanding Output) to
specify distinctions desired in the output data. The Output Emissions Detail Panel consists of
four sub-panels:  Always, for All Vehicle/Equipment Categories, On Road/Off Road, and
Estimate Uncertainty
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 51

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide




B MOVES - C:\EPA\MOVESTestSuite\RunspecsWOVES2010b.mrs - ID 7294082862927004028 [_ fn]fx]^B
File Edit Pre Processing Action Post Processing Tools Settings Help
Description
Time Spans
Geographic Bounds
[+] Vehicles£quipment
Road Type
Pollutants And Processes
Manage Input Data Sets
0 Strategies
j On-Road RetroTit
, Rate Of Progress
^ General Oirtput
Advanced Performance Features

0 Time |Ycar | ^ | 0 On Road/Off Road
0 Pollutant D Road Type
for All VehicleiEquipment Categories 0 Source Use Type
Dscc
Off Road
0F"elTvpe D Sector
0 Emission Process
D HP Class

Number of iterations:
G Keep pseudo-randomly sampled input
D Keep output from each iteration
Load File:

 ^ Note Selecting detailed output here and using MySQL post-processing to aggregate the output
        to the desired level allows control over the aggregation level without re-running the
        model.  This is often the best choice for initial investigation of a question and smaller
        runs.  However, if a run includes many times, locations, source types, etc., you may want
        to reduce the number of items selected on this screen to avoid producing unmanageably
        large output files and longer post-processing queries.

2.2.10.2.1 Always

       The Always box is a reminder that the output data will always contain dimensions for time,
location, and pollutant. The Always box also contains two buttons that allow the user to specify
the level of output aggregation by time and location level.

       By default, the Time button will report the same time level as selected in the Time Spans
panel.  The user may change the time level in the Time button to a value that is equal or longer
than the Time Aggregate Level specified in the Time Spans panel.  For example, if the Time
Aggregate Level is set to Hour in the Time Spans panel, then the Time button can be set to
Hour, 24-Hour Day, Portion of Week, Month, or Year
Page 52
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

       The 24-Hour Day selection does not select a particular day of the week but a kind of day of
the week and the results are for one day of each kind of day requested in the RunSpec (e.g. one
weekend day and/or one weekday). Similarly, the Hour selection will result in hourly output for
each kind of day requested in the RunSpec. In the default case where the MOVES input database
specifies two kinds of days, reporting by Portion of Week reports weekday results as a total of
five weekdays and weekend results as a total of two weekend days.

^ Note The behavior of the aggregation function of the Time selection may cause unexpected
        results. For example, if only two hours of the day are selected in the Time Spans panel,
        but 24-Hour Day is selected in the Output panel, the daily results will only be the sum
        of the two selected hours, not all 24.  Similarly, selecting only weekdays in the Time
        Spans panel, but selecting Month in the Output panel will result in a monthly total that
        only includes weekdays. See the MOVES Software Design Reference Manual for more
        information about how MOVES aggregates output.

       By default, the Location button will report the same geographic aggregation level as
selected in the Geographic Bounds panel.  The user may change the aggregation level in the
Location button to a value that is equal to or larger than the level set in the Geographic Bounds
panel.  For example, if the Geographic Bounds panel is  set to County, then the Location  button
can be set to County, State, or Nation

^ Note The choice of State or Nation will aggregate results from the areas chosen in the
        Geographic Bounds panel.  For example, if only two counties from a state are specified
        in a RunSpec, the output results for State will be the sum of the emissions from only
        these two counties.

       A Pollutant button is not available because MOVES pollutants are always reported
separately in the output. Where aggregation of pollutants is available, the aggregate is listed as a
separate pollutant on the Pollutants and Processes panel, (e.g. Primary Exhaust PM2.5 -
Total)

2.2.10.2.2 For All Vehicle/Equipment Categories

       The dimensions that apply to both on road and off road sources are Model Year, Fuel
Type, and Emission Process. Checking any or all  of these items means that the output will be
distinguished by that factor. For example, if Emission Process is checked, the  output will be
distinguished by the emissions processes selected, such as Running Exhaust, Start Exhaust, etc.

2.2.10.2.3 On-Road/Off Road

       MOVES does not include the ability to model Off Road emissions,  as yet. Thus, within the
On Road/Off Road only the On Road section is functional.  In the On Road box, options are
available to report by Road Type, Source Use Type, or Source Classification Code (SCC).  If
none of these options are checked, no vehicle or road classification distinctions will be made in the
output. Instead, the results will be reported as summed across all vehicle and road classes.

     Source Use Type and SCC are mutually exclusive. Source Use Types are native to
     MOVES, so this is the preferred option. MOVES can report by Source Classification Code

United States Environmental Protection Agency                                               Page 53

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

     (SCC), but this introduces an additional approximation step in the calculations to convert
     output by Source Use Type to SCC.

XCaution!  If Custom Domain is chosen on the Geographic Bounds panel and output is
            distinguished by SCC, you will import the SCC mapping through the County Data
            Manager Zone tab, and input it as a user-input database in the Manage Input Data
            Sets panel. The default database contains no default data about custom domains.
            Additionally, while there is default information for individual counties, you may want
            to review the "sccRoadTypeDistribution" table to determine how the MOVES road
            types translate to the SCC roads types for the county of interest.

       Several interdependences exist among these items.  For example, reporting by SCC
implies that FuelTypes, but not RoadTypes will be distinguished. (The SCC includes an indication
of both the fuel type and the roadway classification.)

2.2.10.2.4 Estimate Uncertainty

       The Estimate Uncertainty function is not available.

2.2.11 Advanced Performance Features

       The Advanced Performance Features panel contains a variety of options that may be of
use to some users. Some of these features may require specialized knowledge to configure.

       Many of these are features which may be used to diagnose problems with the model
software, or to improve the run time for long model runs by saving and reusing intermediate
results. Use  of these features requires knowledge of the detailed software components of the
MOVES program, the inputs they require, and the outputs they produce.
Page 54                                              United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
      MOVES - C:\EPA\MOVESTestSuite\Runspecs\MOVES2010b.mrs - ID 7294082862927004028
     File Edit Preprocessing Action Postprocessing  lools Settings Help
                                    Masterloopable Components
Component
Total Activity Generator (TAG)
tjperatmq Mode Distribution L-'eneiatnr irunnmci uMDij)
Start Operating Mode Distribution Generator
Evaporative upe.rating Mode Distribution uene.ratot
1 ite'.'"'e,;r uperatmq hiMde Distribution uenerator
bource Em Distribution venerator (oBDtf)
Meteorology Generator
Tank Temperature! Generator
Tank. Fuel Generator
Fuel Effects venerator
Lookup uperaling Mode Distribution nenerator
Emission Calculators
On-Road Retrofit
Project-Domain Total Activity Generator
Proie:t-Doinain uperatinq Mnrjp Di=.tntiution |jenerator (lunnina exhausti
Rate uf Progress olrategv1
Donl Execute












































Save Data








































                                    Destination User Dataset
                                    G Copy Saved Generator Data

                                    Server:
                                                                       Create Database
                                    Aggregation and Data Handling
                                    G Do Not Perform Final Aggregation
                                    G Clear MOVESOutput after rate calculations
                                    G Clear MOVESActrvityOutpirt after rate calculations
                                    Custom Input Database

                                    Server:  ["
Database:

T [ Create Database
       This panel allows you to save intermediate results from various portions of the model and
to turn off portions of the model code.

       This panel also allows you to "turn off" final aggregation of MOVES results. Selecting the
Do Not Perform Final Aggregation option can reduce execution time for large runs. When this
option is selected, the MOVES output tables may include rows with duplicate key fields. The
results from these rows must then be summed to produce useful output.  Use this feature with great
care.

       When the Emission Rates calculation type is selected on the Scale panel, the user may
choose to Clear MOVESOutput after rate calculations and Clear MOVESActivityOutput
after rate calculations. These options are recommended because the tables they affect may be
quite large, and the values the tables hold represent only an intermediate step in the rates
calculations rather than the real activity for that time and place.

       Finally, this panel includes a sub-panel where the user can specify an input database to  be
used instead of the MOVES default input database.  Most users will not need this option.

2.3 Main Menu Bar

       The Main Menu Bar runs across the top of the screen and contains eight drop down menus:
File, Edit, Pre Processing, Action, Post Processing, Tools, Settings, and Help  Menus can be
opened by either clicking on the menu command, or by using a keyboard combination, defined as
ALT and the underlined letter of the menu command (e.g., ALT + F for the File menu, ALT + R
for the Pre Processing menu).
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 55

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
2.3.1 File

       File provides a drop-down menu typical of those used when manipulating documents.
Click File to open the drop down menu and then on a menu item to select New, Open, Close,
Save, Save As, Print, Exit, or to choose to open recently opened files.  Use the File commands to
create, load, and save RunSpec objects.  The Example RunSpec may be opened from this menu
(see Executing Example Run Specifications - Section 1.4). Note that the Print command prints
the XML version of the RunSpec, not a screen shot.
                          File! Edit  Preprocessing  Action  Postprocessing look
                          C* New...
                          a Open...
                          C3 Close
                            Save
                            Save As...
                            Print...
                            1 C:CPAJWOVnS*rtOVCSCI IGSourceWlOVi:S2010b.mrs
                            2 [No recent file]
                            3 [No recent file]
                            4 [No recent file]
                            Exit
2.3.2 Edit

       Edit provides the usual cut/copy/paste commands. These commands are only available in
text entry sections of MOVES RunSpec.  Keyboard combinations are available to execute edit
commands when the Edit drop-down box is opened, and can be identified using the "mouse hover"
feature.
                                        Pre Processing  Action
2.3.3 Pre Processing

       The Pre Processing menu contains three active options, Data Importer, County Data
Manager, and Project Data Manager. Each option enables you to access importers for
individual tables in order to create user-supplied databases for direct entry of data into MOVES.
The Project Data Manager, in particular, requires you to provide virtually all of the data required
to model a specific project.
Page 56
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES201 Ob User Guide                                                   March 2012
                                 MOVES - C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHG
                                File Edit I Pre Processing Action  Poi
                                       Execute Data Importer...
                                       Data Importer
                                       County Data Manager
                                       Project Data Manager
        The County Data Manager (CDM) and the Project Data Manager (PDM) are where
you can define the county-specific or project-specific data required if you select County
Domain/Scale or Project Domain/Scale when defining the Scale parameter of the RunSpec.
Neither the County Data Manager nor the Project Data Manager menu options will be enabled
unless you have made the County Domain/Scale or Project Domain/Scale choice.

       The County Data Manager and Project Data Manager are designed to specify all the
inputs required for certain kinds of runs

XCaution!  All tabs/fields in the County Data Manager and Project Data Manager should be
            completed to ensure the output generated is correct. In some cases, a RunSpec may
            execute even though all the tabs in the County Data Manager or Project Data
            Manager were not completed; however, the results from such RunSpecs may
            populate the incomplete tabs with default data, which may not be appropriate due to
            how MOVES generates, calculates, and allocates various data.

!Tip You do not have to specify a database containing county or project data that was created with
     the County Data Manager or Project Data Manager in the Manage Input Data Sets
     panel.  These databases only have to be selected in the Domain Input Database pane of the
     Geographic Bounds panel.  However, databases created with the Data Importer should be
     input using the Manage Input Data Sets panel.

       There are three major differences between working with importers through the Data
Importer and working with the same importers through the County Data Manager and the
Project Data Manager. First, as "domain managers" the County Data Manager and Project
Data Manager indicate whether you have imported all of the data that is needed to establish a new
domain. The County Data Manager and the Project Data Manager will identify  the parameters
where data is needed by displaying red "x-circles" on the importer tabs (shown below). Green
checks indicate where data has been properly and completely imported. The Data Importer does
not display such information.

       Due to the level of detail required and the structure of the underlying data tables, the
County Data Manager restricts the RunSpec to a single county and single calendar year, and the
Project Data Manager restricts the RunSpec to a single hour, day type, month and county. The
Data Importer can be used with any RunSpec.

       The Data Importer is generally used to import data for a RunSpec at the National
Domain/Scale.  Therefore, when importing Population or Vehicle Type VMT  at the National

United States Environmental Protection Agency                                              Page 57

-------
March 2012
                      MOVES2010b User Guide
Domain/Scale, these inputs should be national values even if only a small number of counties are
selected. MOVES will use the default allocation factors for the counties selected in the RunSpec
to apportion data to each county.

       When you select one of the data manager options, the manager window will  open.  This
window contains several tabs to aid in defining the data source, destination, and database structure
for the imported data. Importer tabs provide templates for collecting user-provided data.

2.3.3.1 Database

       The Database tab is the default initial tab for the Data Importer menu option.  It contains:
a text box where you can select an input database from a drop-down list or name a new database;
three buttons to aid in the creation and management of the database; and a scrollable log detailing
the success of the data import and other helpful diagnostics.
  Note  Data cannot be imported until an input database is identified.
     B MOVES County Data M.
        Source Type Population |" @ Vehicle Type VMT [' @ I/M Programs   Q Generic | Tools
          i Fuel
                      id) Meteorology Data
Q Ramp Fraction
© Road Type Distribution
       RunSpec Summary  |  Database  |   J Aye Distribution
   i Aver aye Speed Distribution
                         © Fueltype and Technologies
     Select or create a database to hold the imported data.
     Server:   localhost
                                                               Refresh
     Database:
                                                            Create Database
     Log:
             Clear All Imported Data
                                                                               Database
                                                                                      Done
       By default, the host server for the receiving database is "localhost" (generally the MySQL
data folder on the user's own machine).  You can specify a different host server by entering the
name of the alternate server in the Server box.  The input database can be identified by clicking on
the drop-down arrow adjacent to the Database box and making a selection from the list. You can
Page 58
           United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

also create a new database by typing a database name in the Database box and clicking the Create
Database button.  Clicking the Refresh button will clear the database selection from the Database
box display, refresh the list of databases in the drop-down list, and clear the Log.  The final button
is the Clear All Imported Data button, which clears all the imported data (but not all the tables in
the input tables as some are "core" tables that are populated based on the selections in the RunSpec
at the time the database was created).

XCaution! Never attempt to create a new input database with the same name as the MOVES
           default  database or of any user-supplied MOVES output databases.

     The input database should follow a naming convention to differentiate it from other
     databases; typically, using "_in" at the end of the database name is recommended.

XCaution! When a database is created for a RunSpec at the County or Project Domain/Scale, a
           year table is automatically created with the year selected in the RunSpec. If any files
           are imported with a different year in a field, MOVES will add this year as an
           additional record in the year table. However, even if the incorrect data is cleared
           using the importer, the year table will not be changed, and MOVES will not execute.
           Take care not to import different years into an input database, but if this occurs there
           are currently two solutions: Create and populate a new database with corrected files;
           or Use MySQL or the MySQL Browser to view and delete the row from the table.
           The MySQL queries  to do this are: SELECT * FROM [database_in].year;
           DELETE FROM [database_in].year WHERE yearID=[undesired_year];

       The Database tab also contains a Log panel.  This panel is used by the system to display the
results  of the import process.  Once you choose either the Tools or an Importer tab to import data
into the selected database, you can refer to the Log panel in the Database window to view the
results  of the import process.  The Log panel also includes the description of the imported file, if
one was entered.

2.3.3.2 RunSpec Summary

       The RunSpec Summary provides a summary of RunSpec parameters defined by the user.
You cannot view the Navigation panels of the GUI without closing the Importer, but doing so
may impact your ability to effectively employ Generate Importer XML File in the Tools tab.
Therefore, you should choose this tab to see an overview of the RunSpec.  In setting up the
RunSpec, you define modeling parameters that limit the scope of the modeling process; templates
and export files created with the Data Importer will be limited by choices the user made in
defining the RunSpec.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                               Page 59

-------
March 2012
                                              MOVES2010b User Guide
        MOVES Data Importer
       Source Type Population  Vehicle Type VMT  I/M Programs   Generic  Tools
          Fueltype and Technologies
                                 l i Fuel
                                           Meteorology Data
                                                            Ramp Fraction
                                                                            Road Type Distribution
            RunSpec Summary
                                 Database
                                                Age Distribution
                                                                      Average Speed Distribution
      Output Database Server Name: [using default]

      Dutput Database Name: movestestresults
      Ime Spans:
               Aggregate By: Year
               Years:
                        1999
               Months:
               Days:
               Hours:
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December

Weekend
Weekdays

Begin Hour: 00:00-00:59
End Hour: 23:00-23:69
                                                                        RunSpec Summary
                                                                                          Done
The RunSpec Summary panel of the Data Importer displays the geographic, time span, road
type, vehicle, pollutant and process, and input data set choices made by the user.  The panel is
auto-generated and does not accept user input.

2.3.3.3 Tools

        The Tools tab is provided to facilitate batch input of imported data into the MOVES
system, such as a series of data import files representing all the counties in a state. When you click
the Generate Importer XML File button after completing an import, the system will write an
importer instruction file in Extensible Markup Language (XML), containing a statement that
replicates the import done through the GUI.  The XML file only includes files that have been
imported during the active session so the XML must be generated before you close the Data
Importer.
Page 60
                                   United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
      E MOVES County Data Manager
       @ Ramp Fraction | Q Road Type Distribution) @ Source Type Population | @ Vehicle Type VMT |i§l/M Programs | Q Generic pools
       RunSpec Summary I  Database  I @ Age DistributionI @ Average Speed Distribution  \  11 :,ii 1.1, ii i
      XML-based description file similar to the MOVES RunSpec file.
             Generate Importer XML File
                                                                                           Tools
        Using an XML or text editing program, you can copy and edit the importer XML file to
create a series of similar, but not identical import statements; therefore, naming conventions are
important to use this tool effectively. The resulting XML files can be called from the command
line, generating a series of user-input databases. For more information on running MOVES from
the command line (see Running MOVES from the Command Line - Appendix C).
United States Environmental Protection Agency
        Page 61

-------
March 2012
                            MOVES2010b User Guide
2.3.3.4 Data Managers (Importers)
      H MOVES Data Importer
       Source Type Population! Ven'cle Type VMT   I'M Programs | Generic | Tools
           Fuelty|)e and Technologies
                                  Q Fuel
Meteorology Data
Ftamp Fraction
Road Type Distribution
            RunSpec Summary
                                  Database
                                                  Age Distribution
                                                                         Average Speed Distribution
      description of Imported Data:
      ivll Data Source:

      lie: (please select a file)
                                                                    Clear Imported Data
                                                                                       Browse..
                                       Create Template...
                                                                                     Import
      l/lessages:
        Export Default Data
                                                             Export Imported Data
                                                                  Fueltype and Technologies
                                                                                             Done
        The remaining tabs in the Data Importer menu option are Data Manager or Importer
tabs. These tabs contain templates and rules that aid the user in bringing specific types of data into
the model and ensuring it has the correct format.  By choosing a Manager or Importer, you gain
access to several tools that will help create a successful data import.
Page 62
                 United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
      El MOVES Data Importer
      Source Type Population | Vehicle Type VMT [ I/M Programs^ Generic \ Tools |
          Fueltype and Technologies
                                U Fuel
                                          Meteorology Data
                                                           Riiin|i Fraction
                                                                          Road Type Distribution
           RunSpec Summary
                                Database
                                              Age Distribution
                                                                    Average Speed Distribution
      Description of Imported Data:
      MCoverage Data Source:

      File: (please select a file)
                                                                                 Browse...
                                                                Clear Imported Data  |  Create Template...
                                                                               Import
      Messages:
       Export Default Data
                                                                             /M Programs
!Tip Be sure to fill out all fields in defining the RunSpec before using the County Data Manager
     or the Project Data Manager, as a filter is used when exporting default data that depends on
     selections the user makes when defining the RunSpec. Only the county, year, months,
     vehicles, road types, etc. that have been selected are exported.  Some data may not be
     exported if the Export Default Data button is used before fully defining the Run Spec.

!Tip EPA has developed MOBILE6 converters to help users prepare import-ready data files from
     their existing MOBILE6 files. These  converters are available on the MOVES website.

       Select a Manager or Importer tab to choose a specific importer to assist with specialized
data file structure definition and to complete the import process. Importers for the following tables
are included in MOVES:
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 63

-------
March 2012
            MOVES2010b User Guide
MOVES Table
RampFraction
RoadTypeDistribution
SourceTypePopulation
VehicleTypeVMT
Zone
AgeDistribution
AverageSpeedDistribution
Fuel
Fuel Type and Technologies
MeteorologyData
I/M Programs
OperatingModeDistribution
LinkSourceType
LinkDriveSchedules
Off-Network

Data Importer
X
X
X
X
X (Custom Domain
Only)
X
X
X
X
X
X





County Data Manager
X
X
X
X
X (Custom
Domain Only)
X
X
X
X
X
X





Project Data Manager





X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

When you select one of these tabs, a panel opens allowing you to define the import parameters.
Each Importer tab is organized in the same way, with a place for a description of the data; a place
where the corresponding MOVES default database table and an input file are identified; buttons to
browse for data files, create templates, clear, import, and export data; and a space for messages
indicating the success or potential errors with the import process.
      B MOVES County Data Ma
       Q Ramp Fraction ' @ Road Type Distribution  i J Source Type Population  Lj Vehicle Type VMTf @ UM Programs [  Q Generic f Tools |
       RunSpec Summary  Database  |j'~iffi"Age Distrilnrtion  ( @ Average Speed Distribution  [" @ Fueltype and Technologies  [' @ Fuel [  @ Meteorology Data
      Description of Imported Data:
      soiirceTypeAgeDistribirtion Data Source:

      File: (please select a file)
                                                                          Clear Imported Data    Create Template...
                                                                                     Import
      Messages:
                                                             Export Imported Data
                                                                                   Age Distribution
Page 64
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                   March 2012
       Near the top of each importer panel is a text box that allows a description of the data or file
being imported. Any text entered here will be reported and saved in the Database Log. Just below
the Description box is the Data Source section of the window.  Along the left side of this section is
text that states: [MOVESTable] Data Source.  The [MOVESTable] corresponds to the name of the
table in the MOVES default database for which the tab will import data.  In most cases, the tab
header and MOVESTable name are similar, but in some cases they are not (e.g. Meteorology
Data corresponds to the ZoneMonthHour table because temperatures are defined for each zone,
month, and hour). Refer to the MOVESTable in the MOVES default database to learn more about
that table, its structure, and the data contained within it.

 9 Note  The default database table may contain more fields than the template or exported default
         files (described below).  There are several reasons why these additional fields may exist
         in the default table (e.g., the population and VMT tables each include a growth factor that
         is not used in the County Domain/Scale because only a single year can be modeled). Be
         aware that if the fields do not exist in the template or exported default data file, then these
         fields should not be added or populated.

       Also in the Data Source section of the window are the Browse, Clear Imported Data, and
Create Template buttons. After clicking the Browse button, you can search through the
computer's (or network's) drives to identify the file containing the data to be imported. Upon
selecting a file, you may be prompted to select a worksheet:
                               H Choose XLS Worksheet
                               Select the Worksheet to read:
                                HPMSVTyneYear
                               monthVMTFraction-calculated
                               dayVMTFraction-calculated
                               hourVMTFraction-manual
                               Instructions
                               Import HPMS AADVMT and Factors
                               Daily VMT by HPMS and Month
                               Monthly VMT
                               monthVMTFraction-default
                                 OK
Cancel
       The correct worksheet should be highlighted before the OK button becomes active.

       Click the Create Template button to create an import template file and a set of reference
files.  After selecting the Create Template button, define the file, file path and extension (e.g., .xls
for an Excel file) and click the Save button. The template and reference files will be specific to the
RunSpec.  The template will include required data field names and often will be populated with the
required key fields, as specified in the Run Spec. The reference files will provide lists and
descriptions of the relevant MOVES ID fields (i.e., countylD codes, fuelformulationID codes,
roadtypelD codes, hourDaylD codes, and sourcetypelD codes).  You can then edit the template
with a spreadsheet application or other tool before importing the data files into MOVES.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                          Page 65

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
       Although the meaning of many data element names may seem clear, consult the reference
tables provided with the template to determine appropriate content for the fields. For example,
although fuelYearlD might seem to refer to the calendar year, it actually refers to "fuelyear" and
does not have a one-to-one mapping with calendar year (the latest fuelyear in MOVES2010b is
2012).

       In many cases, you can import duplicate information by using "wildcards" in the input
files.  See Table 2.3.3.4b. For example, using the word "ALL" in a sourceTypelD column of the
input file will result in records with the same information for each source type selected in the
runspec.

XCaution!  "ALL" produces inputs only for all the sourcetypes in the RunSpec rather than all the
            sourcetypes in the default database.  For this reason, you are strongly urged to create
            a comprehensive RunSpec prior to using the importers.

       The hourDaylD column supports a special form of the "ALL" wildcard. It allows you to
populate all 48 hour intervals (24 x 2 day types) or just the hours in a given day type. Remember,
these are constrained by the RunSpec day and hour selections.

       The affected fields are:
Column
daylD
hourlD
hourDaylD
monthID
yearlD
roadTypelD
sourceTypelD
hpmsVTypelD
county ID
zonelD
Wildcard
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL Weekday
ALLS
5*
*5
ALL Weekend
ALL 2
2*
*2
ALL
ALL Note: Only one year is allowed in the CDM.
ALL
ALL
1 * - Applies to all motorcycles
2* - Applies to all passenger cars
3 * - Applies to all passenger trucks
4* - Applies to all buses
5 * - Applies to all single unit trucks
6* - Applies to all combination trucks
ALL
ALL Note: Only one county is allowed in the CDM.
ALL
       In the receiving database, wildcard data is fully expanded.  Importing a file that uses
wildcards and then exporting again will produce a file with the full data set.

       Once a correctly formatted source file is created, use the Browse button to find and open
the source file. The file path and name of the selected import file will appear in the panel.
Page 66
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
!Tip   Make sure to save any changes made to a source file before you import it.

^ Note Warning messages do not necessarily mean that the imported data is incorrect. For
        example, you may receive a warning if data for a source types, month, etc. are imported,
        but that source type or month is not selected in the RunSpec. On the other hand, error
        messages indicate situations where the source file should be amended to correct the
        problem, the data should be cleared, and the file re-imported.

       Once a file has been selected for import, click the Import button to bring the data into
MOVES via the file and path defined in the Database window.  If the file contains multiple
worksheets, you are prompted to select the appropriate worksheet as well. Refer to the Messages
box in the Importer tab or the Log panel in the Database window to determine the status of data
import.

!Tip   See the Messages box for information on import problems and basic information for fixing
       problematic import files.

       Imported data can be cleared from the database by clicking the Clear Imported Data
button, which is in the Data Source section of the window.  When the Clear Imported Data
button is clicked, the following message box will pop-up:
                            Are you sure you want to clear the data?
                                     es    No
Clicking Yes clears the data, while clicking No cancels the action and allows you to export the
imported data, as described below.

!Tip   You should Clear Imported Data before reattempting to import a file that resulted in an
       error message.

       Data files can be exported to an Excel spreadsheet or text file using either the Export
Default Data or Export Imported Data button; however, not all tabs in the County Data
Manager have the Export Default Data button. These exceptions are noted in the sections
below. Also, some tabs in the Project Data Manager include an additional export button, Export
Most Recent Execution Data. Use of this button requires a previous execution of the MOVES
model in order to generate the data which is to be exported.

       Clicking on an Export button will  cause the Export [Importer] Data window to open.
Define the file path, file name and file extension in the Export Data window, and click the Save
button to export the data to the specified location.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
      Page 67

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
       Occasionally, clicking an Export button may result in the following pop-up window:
                   No Data
                          No data was retrieved. Consult the user guide for more options.
                                              OK
       This message simply means that there was no data available to export.

2.3.3.4.1 Meteorology Data Importer

       The Meteorology Data Importer allows you to import temperature and humidity data for
months, zones, counties, and hours that are included in the RunSpec.  While the MOVES model
contains 30-year average temperature and humidity data for each county, month, and hour, you
should enter data specific to the modeled location and time.

2.3.3.4.2 Source Type Population Importer

       The Source Type Population Importer allows you to input the number of vehicles in the
geographic area which is to be modeled for each vehicle or "source type" selected in the RunSpec.
While the MOVES table that this importer populates (SourceTypeYear) includes fields for sales
growth rate and migration factor, neither of these fields should be imported.  They are extraneous
because the importer sets the selected year as a base year and defines the population.

XCaution! Vehicle Type VMT, Source Type Population, and Age Distribution are the three
           tables that MOVES needs to define a base year. If any one of these tables is
           imported, then all three must be imported, otherwise MOVES may not generate
           output. However, this requirement does not apply to the Project Domain/Scale.

       This tab does not have the Export Default Data button and you are required to
acquire/generate this data independently if the County Domain/Scale is chosen. Data must be
supplied for each source type (e.g., passenger car, passenger trucks, light commercial trucks, etc.)
selected in the RunSpec.
Page 68
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
2.3.3.4.3 Age Distribution Importer

       The Age Distribution Importer allows you to enter data that provides the distribution of
vehicle counts by age for each calendar year (yearlD) and vehicle type (sourceTypelD). The
distribution of agelDs (the variable for age) must sum to one for each vehicle type and year.

XCaution!  Vehicle Type VMT, Source Type Population, and Age Distribution are the three
             tables that MOVES needs to define a base year. If any one of these tables is
             imported, then all three must be imported, otherwise MOVES may not generate
             output. However, this requirement does not apply to the Project Domain/Scale.
         OVES Data Importer
       Source Type Population | Vehicle Type VMT | I/M Programs | Generic ' Tools
          Fueltype and Technologies
                               i J Fuel
                                         Meteorology Data
                                                         Ramp Fraction
                                                                        Road Type Distribution
           RunSpec Summary
                               Database
                                             Age Distribution

                                                                  Average Speed Distribution
      Description of Imported Data:
      sourceTypeAgeDistribution Data Source:

      File: (please select a file)
                                                                               Browse...
                                                              Clear Imported Data  |  Create Template...
                                                                            Import
      Messages:
                                                     Export Imported Data
                                                                        Age Distribution
                                                                                     Done
       This tab does not have the Export Default Data button and you are required to
acquire/generate this data independently if either the County or Project Domain/Scale are chosen.

2.3.3.4.4 Vehicle Type VMT and VMT Fractions

       The Vehicle Type VMT importer allows you to enter yearly vehicle miles traveled (VMT)
and the monthly, type of day, and hourly VMT fractions. These values will represent national
values for the general Data Importer and county-specific values for the County Data Manager.
MOVES requires that yearly VMT be imported regardless of the time span selected for the run,
although the VMT Fraction tables can be modified such that the value does not have to actually
represent the VMT for the entire year in the area being modeled. Note that the appearance of this
table differs from other tabs as multiple data sources are listed in the data source section. Expand
the size of the CDM window or use the scroll bar to view all the data sources and buttons.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 69

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
!Tip The MOVES website has spreadsheet tools to calculate yearly VMT from Average Annual
     Weekday VMT (AADVMT) and to convert MOBILE6 formatted VMT data into MOVES
     format.

XCaution! Vehicle Type VMT, Source Type Population, and Age Distribution are the three
            tables that MOVES needs to define a base year. If any one of these tables is
            imported, then all three must be imported, otherwise MOVES may not generate
            output. However, this requirement does not apply to the Project Domain/Scale.
     B MOVES County Data Manager
      FtunSpec Summary  Database
               & Fuel \ ® Meteorology Data
     Ascription of Imported Data:
     HPMSVTypeYear Data Source:
     He: (please select a rile)
                                                               Clear Imported Data   Create Template...
     monthVMTFraction Data Source:
     File: (please select a tile)
                                                                           Import
     Messages:
      Export Default Data
                                                                      Vehicle Type VMT
       The Export Default Data button for this tab exports the default monthVMTFraction,
dayVMTFraction, and hourVMTFraction tables. An HPMSVTypeYear table with values of zero
for all HPMS classes is also exported, which can serve as a template that you can edit before
importing, but you are required to acquire/generate the VMT data independently if the County
Domain/Scale is chosen. Data must be supplied for each HPMSVType (e.g., passenger cars,
combination trucks, etc.) implied by the Source Use Types selected in the RunSpec.

       Each of the VMT Fraction tables must sum to 1 across a varying set of fields. The
monthVMTFraction table must sum to 1 for each sourcetype.  The dayVMTFraction table must
sum to 1 for each source type-month-road type combination.  The hourVMTFraction must sum to
1 for each source type-road type-type of day combination.  In the monthVMTFraction table, you
must also correctly identify whether the year being modeling is (Y) or is not (N) a leap year in the
'isLeapYear' field.
Page 70
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

XCaution!  For all the VMTFraction tables (month, day, and hour), a warning message will
            appear if the fractions provided by the user sum to less than 1, and the tab header will
            erroneously turn to a green check. This should be an error message, and the tab
            header should be red. Enter VMTFraction tables that sum to 1 even if not all 12
            months, 2 types of day, or all 24 hours are being modeled.

            Modeling a portion of a year has two options:  import a true yearly VMT value (i.e. a
            value defining VMT for all months,  days, and hours) and give the desired allocation
            to the time periods being modeled and populate the other months, day, or hours with
            placeholder values such that the each of the VMTFraction tables correctly sums to 1.
            Or, import only the amount of VMT appropriate for the time period being modeled
            and may assign values that correctly allocate this VMT over the modeled time
            periods. You may also enter data only in the HPMSVTypeYear Data Source importer
            and ignore the month, day and hour fraction importers.  If this is done, MOVES will
            apply default fractions for month, day and hour.

       The Import button will import the file identified for each data source at once.  Therefore,
you can, but are not required to, select all four files before importing. You can also clear one data
source file at a time by clicking the Clear Imported Data button associated with each data source.

        The overall  Import button on the Vehicle Type VMT importer should not be depressed
        until all of the desired individual imports have been selected using the respective Browse
        buttons.
2.3.3.4.5 Average Speed Distribution Importer

       The Average Speed Distribution Importer allows you to input average speed data
specific to vehicle type (sourceTypelD), road type (roadTypelD), and time of day/type of day
(hourdaylD).  MOVES defines 16 "speed bins" which describe the average driving speed on a
roadtype or link. You must enter the fraction of driving time in each speed bin (avgSpeedFraction)
for each hour/day type, vehicle type, road type, and average speed (avgspeedbinid), where the
fractions sum to unity for each combination of vehicle type, road type, and hour/day type specified
in the RunSpec.  If desired, use wildcards to apply one set of fractions for all hour/day
combinations for a specific vehicle type and road type. Note that MOVES uses a time-based
distribution, whereas MOBILE6.2 used a VMT-based speed distribution. You need to adjust your
travel model post-processing code in order to generate the new distributions. Default values may
be exported in the County Data Manager.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                               Page 71

-------
March 2012
           MOVES2010b User Guide
     B MOVES Data Importer
      Source Type Population! Vehicle Type VMT |" liM Programs \ Generic \ Tools
          Fueltype and Technologies
                                ij Fuel
                                          Meteorology Data
                                                          Ftamp Fraction
                                                                         Road Type Distribution
           FuinSpec Summary
                                Database
                                              Age Distribution
                                                                   Average Speed Distribution
     Description of Imported Data:
     avgSpeedDistribution Data Source:

     File: (please select a file)
                                                                                Browse...
                                                               Clear Imported Data    Create Template...
                                                                              Import
     Messages:
       Export Default Data
                                                         Export Imported Data
                                                            Average Speed Distribution
                                                                                      Done
2.3.3.4.6 Road Type Distribution Importer

       The Road Type Distribution Importer allows you to enter data relating to the vehicle
miles traveled by road type (roadTypeVMTFraction) for the domain being modeled.  This data is
entered as a distribution across road types (roadTypelD), where only road types selected in the
RunSpec  are included in the distribution.  The distribution must sum to 1 for each source type.

 ^ Note  When comparing input roadtype distributions to the VMT output in the
         MOVESActivityOutput table, it may not appear that the road type distribution was
         applied properly if you look only at individual hourly or daily VMT results.  However,
         you must compare the input road type distribution to the total weekly VMT by weighting
         the VMT results by the number of each type of day (5 weekdays, 2 weekend days). The
         VMT should be compared at a weekly level because of the effect of the dayVMTFraction
         table on the VMT output. For example, in the default DayVMTFraction table, the
         weekend fraction for rural roads is slightly higher than the weekend fraction for urban
         roads.  If these default dayVMTFraction values are applied, the VMT in MOVES output
         by daytype will  show a slightly higher-than-average fraction of total VMT on urban roads
         on weekdays, and on rural roads on weekends.
Page 72
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
       MOVES Data Importer
      Source Type Population  Vehicle Type VMT   1,'M Programs [Generic [Tools
         Fuelfype and Technologies
                               i J Fuel
                                         Meteorology Data
                                                          Ftamp Fraction
                                                                         Road Type Distribution
           RunSpec Summary
                                             Age Distribution
                                                                   Average Speed Distribution
     Description of Imported Data:
     Oinll vi'eLMsiiiliinion Data Source:

     File: (please select a file)
                                                                                Browse...
                                                               Clear Imported Data    Create Template...
                                                                             Import
     Messages:
                                                     Export Imported Data
                                                                 Road Type Distribution
                                                                                      Done
       This tab does not have the Export Default Data button and you are required to
acquire/generate this data independently if the County Domain/Scale is chosen.

2.3.3.4.7 Ramp Fraction Importer

       The Ramp Fraction Importer allows you to modify the fraction of ramp driving time on
selected road types. Only limited access roadtypes (freeways and interstates) may have their ramp
fractions modified.  Thus, this Importer is only active if you select a limited access road type
when defining the RunSpec.

       The County Data Manager automatically applies default values of 0.08 (8%) for this
parameter if the you do not provide input, so importing ramp fractions is optional when County
Domain/Scale is chosen

 ^ Note  The Ramp Fraction tab will only become available if a restricted road type (i.e. 2 or 4)
         is selected in the RunSpec.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 73

-------
March 2012
                           MOVES2010b User Guide
 B MOVES Data Importer
  Source Type Population  Vehicle Type VMT   1,'M Programs   Generic [ Tools
      Fueltype and Technologies
                              U Fuel
Meteorology Data
Ramp Fraction
Road Type Distribution
        RunSpec Summary
                              Database
     Age Distribution
          Average Speed Distribution
 Description of Imported Data:
  oadType Data Source:

 File: (please select a file)
                                           Browse...
                                                                 Clear Imported Data    Create Template...
                                                                                  Import
 Messages:
   Export Default Data
                 Export Imported Data
                                                                             Ramp Fraction
2.3.3.4.8 Fuel

       The Fuel Formulation and the Fuel Supply importers should be used together to input
appropriate fuel data.  The Fuel Formulation importer allows you to select an existing fuel in the
MOVES database and change its properties, or create a new fuel formulation with different fuel
properties.  All fuel formulations imported in the Fuel Supply importer must exist in the MOVES
default FuelFormulation table or be imported. If you define a new fuel, all of the fields except the
last three (BioDiesel, Cetane and PAHContent) are required. Biodiesel may be modeled by
entering a biodiesel volume in the Fuel Formulation table and a 'marketshare' for the new
biodiesel fuel in the Fuel Supply table. The inputs for the Cetane and PAHContent variables are
currently inactive in MOVES.
Page 74
                United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
       The Fuel Formulation importer allows you to change the following fuel properties:
Property
FuelFormulationlD
Fuel Sub-Type
RW
Sulfur Level
ETOH Volume
MTBE Volume
ETBE Volume
TAME Volume
Aromatic Content
Olefin Content
Benzene Content
E200
E300
VolToWtPercentOxy
BioDieselEster Volume
Cetane Index
PAHContent
T50
T90
Description
Fuel formulation identification number. Must be greater than
100 and less than 25000
Fuel Sub-type coding — see Template File
Reid vapor pressure in psi
Fuel sulfur level in ppm Sulfur
Ethanol Volume (% vol)
MTBE Volume (% vol)
ETBE Volume (% vol)
TAME Volume (% vol)
Aromatic content (% wt)
Olefin content (% wt)
Benzene content (% wt)
Lower volatility percentage (%)
Upper volatility percentage (%)
Constant based on oxygenate type
BioDiesel Ester Volume (%)
Not Implemented - NULL
Not Implemented - NULL
Temperature (F) where 50% of the fuel is vapor
Temperature (F) where 90% of the fuel is vapor
                                   Table 2.3.3.4.2 Fuel Formulation
       The Fuel Supply importer allows you to assign existing fuels to counties, months, and
years, and to assign the associated market share for each fuel. The market share for a given fuel
type (gasoline, diesel, etc.) must sum to 1 for each county, fuelyear (i.e., calendar year), and
month. In MOVES, you may select fuels from those available in the default database or create
your own fuel inputs. Any new fuels which are added to the Fuel Supply importer must either be
added in the Fuel Formulation importer or must already exist in the default MOVES database.
You must be sure to identify a fuel formulation for all vehicle-fuel type combinations selected in
the On Road Vehicle Equipment panel.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 75

-------
March 2012
           MOVES2010b User Guide
        MOVES Data Importer
       Source Type Population  Vehicle Type VMT | I/M Programs [Generic \Tools
          Fueltype and Technologies
                                U Fuel
                                          Meteorology Data
                                                          Ramp Fraction
                                                                         Road Type Distribution
           RnnSpec Summary
                                Database
                                              Age Distribution
                                                                   Average Speed Distribution
      Description of Imported Data:
      FuelSuppry Data Source:

      File: (please select a file)
                                                                                 Browse...
                                                               Clear Imported Data   Create Template...
      FuelFormulation Data Source:

      He: (please select a file)
                                                                                 Browse...
                                                               Clear Imported Data   Create Template...
                                                                               Import
      Messages:
       Export Default Data
                                                         Export Imported Data
       This importer also allows you to supply a data element, "marketShareCV", which is the
coefficient of variation for the market share.  This would be used if uncertainty calculations were
enabled. For MOVES the value is not required and may be left blank.

XCaution!  Although fuelYearlD might seem to refer to the calendar year, the year table in the
             MOVES default database maps all years 2012 through 2050 to the "fuelyear" 2012;
             thus for years 2012 through 2050, the fuelyearid 2012 should be used.

!Tip   Modeling different fuels in different years (2012-and later) can be done with a separate run
       for each year, assigning different fuels to the 2012 fuelyearid for each run.

2.3.3.4.9 Fueltype and Technologies

       The Fueltype and Technologies importer is a new feature in MOVES2010B.  It replaces
the previous  Strategy called Alternative Vehicle and Fuel Technologies (AVFT)  It allows you
to specify the distribution of fuel types in the model.  Specifically, this importer allows you to
supply the fleet distribution fraction by fuel type, source type, model year, and engine technology.
A value of' 1' designating "conventional internal combustion" for engine technology is generally
supplied.  Data for the fuel types specified in the Runspec should be supplied.  The data entry
fuelEngFraction must sum to unity across all the fuel types for a given source type, model year,
and engine technology. No single entry may be less than zero or greater than one.  For both the
County Domain Manager and the Project Domain Manager, you can export a complete set of
default values.
Page 76
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
XCaution! When entering data in the Fueltype and Technologies Importer,  select in the
             Vehicles/Equipment — On Road Vehicles panel, all of the fuel types for each vehicle
             source type they wish to model. For example, if it is desired to model a fleet of 100
             percent diesel transit buses,  select gasoline and CNG transit buses in their RunSpec.
             Otherwise, MOVES will compute an incorrect number of buses in the fleet.
     H MOVES Data Importer
      Source Type Population  Vehicle Type VMT | I/M Programs | Generic | Tools
          FueHype and Technologies
                               U Fuel
                                         Meteorology Data
                                                         Ramp Fraction
                                                                        Ftoad Type Distrihution
           RunSpec Summary
                               Database
                                             Age Distribution
                                                                  Average Speed Distribution
      )escription of Imported Data:
      ivtr Data Source:
      :ile: (please select a file)
                                                                              Browse...
                                                              Clear Imported Data   Create Template...
                                                                             Import
      Messages:
       Export Default Data
                                                       Export Imported Data
                                                           Fueltype and Technologies
                                                                                    Done
2.3.3.4.10 Zone Importer

       In MOVES2010b, the Zone Road Activity Importer is now the Zone Importer.  It is
used (and will only appear) if the Custom Domain option is chosen in the County Domain
Manager.  Currently, MOVES only has the capability to model one offnetwork zone at a time
within a Custom Domain, though multiple zones containing non-offnetwork road types are
supported

       The Zone Importer contains three separate tables that need to be supplied by the user.
These are the Zone table, the ZoneRoadType table and the SCCRoadTypeDistribution table. None
of these tables have the Export Default Data button, so first create a file template to populate the
tables.

2.3.3.4.10.1 Zone Table

       The Zone table contains the startAllocFactor, the idleAllocFactor and the SHPAllocFactor
for each zonelD / countylD.  All of these factors must sum to unity  across all custom zones.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 77

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

2.3.3.4.10.2 ZoneRoadType Table

       The ZoneRoadType table contains the SHOAllocFactor for each zonelD and roadTypelD.
The data must be entered for each roadTypelD in the RunSpec. Typical input should be four rows
of data with the SHOAllocFactor set to unity in all cases.

2.3.3.4.10.3 SCCRoadTypeDistribution Table

       The Source Classification Code SCCRoadTypeDistribution table contains the
sccRoadTypeFraction. A value must be submitted for each zonelD, roadTypelD and
sccRoadTypelD. There must be an entry for each road type selected in the RunSpec and a value
for each of the twelve sccRoadTypelDs.  The sum across the twelve sccRoadTypelDs for a given
roadtype must be unity for each custom zone.
2.3.3.4.11 Links Importer

       The Links Importer is used only in the Project Data Manager.  It allows you to define
individual roadway links.  The MOVES links need not correspond to traffic modeling "links", but
each link should be uniform in its activity as described its MOVES parameters.  Each link requires
a linkID (i.e., a unique integer between 1 and 99999 that is used to reference the link in the
program). Other required inputs for each link are countylD, zonelD, and roadTypelD (these same
entries must be specified in the RunSpec or an error will occur), the length of the roadway link in
units of miles, the traffic volume on the roadway link in units of vehicles per hour, the average
speed of all of the vehicles on the roadway link in the given hour, and the average road grade % of
a particular link. The link description field is a text field included for reference and has no impact
on the calculations.

       In addition to roadway links, a project may include a single "off-network" (parking lot or
other non-road) link.  For an off-network link, enter a value of zero for link length, link volume,
link average speed and link average grade (percent grade).

       For Project level modeling, you have a choice of ways to describe the speed, acceleration
and power of the vehicles being modeled. Depending on the information available for each
roadway link, you may enter an operating mode distribution, a drive schedule or an average speed.
For a given roadway link,  a user-supplied operating mode distribution input will take calculation
precedence over an imported  drive schedule, which will take calculation precedence over an
average link speed input when more than one is entered for a given link.

       Use of a link average  speed input in the Links Importer requires the least amount of road
link data to be provided by you.  All that is required is an average link speed and an average link
road grade (in units of percent grade). The model will use built-in driving schedules and an
interpolation algorithm to produce a default operating mode distribution.
Page 78                                               United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
       Table 2.3.3.4.11 shows the allowable ranges for the average speed inputs in Project level
runs.  You may enter any speed in units of miles per hour (mph) within the given range. Average
link speed inputs outside of the speed range will cause the closest available drive cycle to be
selected, and issue a warning message to the user.

       These average speed ranges exist in MOVES project level because these ranges represent
the extent of the available driving cycle data in the MOVES model.  The MOVES model does not
extrapolate beyond its built-in data. Should you desire to model a link with an average speed that
is less than the minimum or greater than the maximum, you must supply the second by second
driving schedule or an equivalent operating mode distribution.
Allowable Average Speed Input Range for Project Level Input
By Source Type
sourceTypelD
11
21
31
32
41
42
43
51
52
53
54
61
62
sourceTypeName
Motorcycle
Passenger Car
Passenger Truck
Light Commercial Truck
Intercity Bus
Transit Bus
School Bus
Refuse Truck
Single Unit Short-haul Truck
Single Unit Long-haul Truck
Motor Home
Combination Short-haul Truck
Combination Long-haul Truck
Minimum Speed
(mph)
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4.6
15.0
15.0
2.2
4.6
4.6
4.6
5.8
5.8
Maximum Speed
(mph)
73.8
73.8
73.8
73.8
72.8
72.8
72.8
71.7
72.8
72.8
72.8
71.7
71.7
                                Table 2.3.3.4.11 Allowable Average Speed
2.3.3.4.12 Link Source Types Importer

       The Link Source Types Importer is used only in the Project Data Manager. It is used
to enter the fraction of the link traffic volume which is driven by each source type. It is not used to
enter off-network data, and is not required if the Project contains only an off-network link. For
each linkID, the sourceTypeHourFraction must sum to one across all source types. If you enter
data for source types which are not selected in the RunSpec, MOVES will ignore that data.  The
Project level calculator will not re-normalize the fractions to omit the contribution of source types
which are not selected in the RunSpec.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 79

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

2.3.3.4.13 Operating Mode Distribution Importer

       The Operating Mode Distribution Importer is used only in the Project Data Manager.
It allows you to import operating mode fraction data for source types, hour / day combinations,
roadway links and pollutant / process combinations that are included in the RunSpec and Project
domain. This data is entered as a distribution across operating modes. Operating modes are
modes of vehicle activity that have a distinct emission rate. For example, running activity has
modes that are distinguished by their Vehicle Specific Power and instantaneous speed. Start
activity has modes that are distinguished by the time the vehicle has been parked prior to the start
("soak time").  See EPA technical reports for additional information on operating modes.  For a
given source type, hour/day combination, roadway link and pollutant / process combination, the
operating mode distribution must sum to one.

       The Operating Mode Distribution Importer must be entered directly into the Project Data
Manager when modeling any 'non-running emission' process.  The start process has eight
operating modes that require data and tire wear has sixteen operating modes.  It is optional for
modeling 'running emission' processes. But if chosen, data for all twenty-three running exhaust
operating modes must be entered. For the running processes, Operating Mode Importer data
has precedent over data entered in the Link Drive Schedules Importer and the Links Importer
average speed input if conflicting data are entered.

2.3.3.4.14 Link Drive Schedules Importer

       The Link Drive Schedules Importer is used only in the Project Data Manager. It allows
you to define the precise speed and grade as a function of time (seconds) on a particular roadway
link. The time domain is entered in units of seconds, the speed variable in miles per hour and the
grade variable in percent grade (i.e., vertical distance / lateral distance; 100% grade equals a 45
degree slope).

       This Importer is used for the Project Data Manager only when modeling 'running
emission' processes when the Link Drive Schedules Importer is used.  For a given roadway link,
an operating mode distribution input will take calculation precedence over an imported drive
schedule.  An imported drive schedule will take calculation precedence over an average link speed
input when more than one is entered for a given link. However, at least one of three (an operating
mode distribution, a link drive schedule or  a link average speed) must be entered for each of the
defined roadway links.

2.3.3.4.15 Off-Network Importer

       The Off-Network Importer is used only in the Project Data Manager. It provides
information about vehicles which are not driving on the project links, but still contribute to the
project emissions. For each source type in the RunSpec, vehicle population is the average number
of "off-network" vehicles  during the hour being modeled. The start fraction field is a number
from 0 to 1.0 which specifies the fraction of this population which has a 'start' operation in the
given hour. The extendedldle fraction field is a number from 0 to 1.0 which specifies the fraction
of the population which has had an 'extended idle' operation in the given hour.
Page 80                                               United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

       When using a Custom Domain, the off-network information is applied to each custom
zone. It is important to include exactly one off-network link regardless the number of custom
zones.

       For example, a vehicle population of 10 long-haul combination trucks with a start fraction
of 0.5 and, an extended idle fraction of 0.25 includes the emissions associated with 5 starts, 150
minutes of extended idling (10 vehicles * 60 minutes *0.25) and 300 minutes of parking (10
vehicles * 60 minutes * 0.5) for this sourcetype.

^ Note MOVES computes extended idle emissions only for long-haul combination trucks, not
        for other sourcetypes; thus the extendedldleFraction is ignored for sourceTypelDs other
        than 62.

^ Note MOVES does not compute evaporative emissions at the Project Domain/Scale; thus, the
        parked vehicle fraction is ignored.

2.3.3.4.16 I/M Programs Importer

       The I/M Programs Importer is used in both the County Domain Manager and Project
Data Manager. It allows you to specify the level of compliance and general effectiveness of your
I/M program design.  The compliance factor input is a multiplicative factor that encompasses I/M
program performance metrics such as waiver rates, exemptions, special training programs and
general effectiveness.  It can range from 0 percent (a program that has no effectiveness or merit) to
100 percent (highest possible success). The compliance factor is entered as a function of pollutant-
process, location, source type, model year range, fuel type and specific I/M test types.  The
variable "useEVIyn" is a yes/no status that controls the use of the data.  The lack of data in this
importer will lead to the modeling of a "no I/M" scenario.

       When using the county data manager, the I/M Programs input tab will never automatically
supply I/M Coverage data to the county input database.  This is indicated by the red 'x' mark, and
is true even if the selected county has  an I/M program.  The MOVES  program will successfully
run with a no I/M program scenario if the I/M Coverage tab has a red 'x' mark. If you desire to
utilize the default I/M data for a given county, you must select the Export Default Data Button to
export the default data to a spreadsheet and then import the data back into the county input
database. The new "No I/M program" check box will clear all existing I/M data from the county input
database and set the database to a no I/M status.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                               Page 81

-------
March 2012
                                       MOVES2010b User Guide
2.3.4 Action

      Action provides a drop-down menu with the choices Execute, Stop, Pause, Resume, and
MOVES Run Error Log.
            H MOVES - C:\Epa\Moves\MOVESGHGSource\MOVES2009Example.mis - ID
             File  Edit Pre Processing
                      Description
                   j   Scale

                      Times
Time Spans
             Action  Postprocessing  T_ools  Settings  Help
Execute
Stop
Pause
Resume
MOVES Run Error Log...
  T
       After satisfying the RunSpec input requirements. All check marks in the Navigation Panel
must be set to green checks or yellow tildes (see Navigation Panel - Section 2.2). Choose
Execute to begin the MOVES simulation.  Choose Stop or Pause in the Action menu to stop or
pause the execution of the MOVES program. These two items will only be active if the MOVES
program is running. You may also resume a paused MOVES simulation by clicking the Resume
item.

 9 Note A program that has been stopped cannot be resumed.

 9 Note Depending upon where the MOVES program is in its processing, the Stop Command
        may not end a MOVES run immediately.  If necessary, MOVES can be terminated by
        clicking the X in the upper right hand corner of the MOVES GUI or the MOVES
        command line window.
       Click MOVES Run Error Log to display information on the processing outcome of the
execution in the MOVES Run Error Log window. Alternatively, the log can be displayed by
selecting the ALT and R keys when the Action menu option is open.

9 Note The MOVES Run Error Log option is available only if a MOVES Output database has
        been created.

       Typically, you should select MOVES Run Error Log immediately after the MOVES
program has completed its execution. The window (shown below) will contain either a message
stating that the run was successful and that no errors occurred, or it will report a brief error
message. The example shows a successful run, indicating the run number (Run  5) and the time
and date of the run. You can also view  the Run Error Log for the error status of previous runs by
clicking the down arrow on the right side of the Select Run button.
Page 82
                             United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                                         March 2012
  Note Not all error log messages indicate invalid results. For example, "Warning: RunSpec
        doesn't have all the RoadTypes", indicates a problem with the RunSpec only if you had
        intended to include all roadtypes.
            MOVES Run Error Log
          Select Run:
Run: 5-2004-07-19 11:06:11 ^
OK
          No MOVESError log entries for RunlD = 5
2.3.5 Post Processing

       MOVES output databases can be viewed and processed directly using MySQL Query
Browser or other database tools. In addition, MOVES provides a few simple options to post-
process and view the MOVES results. Post Processing contains three menu options, Run
MySQL Script on Output Database, Produce Summary Report, and Produce State/County
Map. These features can be used after a successful execution of a MOVES RunSpec to further
process the MOVES results into more aggregate or easy-to-use formats.
              MOVES - C:\Epa\Moves\MOVESGHGSource\MOVES2009Exampl6.mrs - ID 45
            File Edit  Pre Processing  Action
                      Post Processing  Tools  Settings Help
                      Description

                      Scale
                       Run MySQL Script on Output Database
                       Produce Summary Report
                       Produce State/County Map
2.3.5.1 Run MySQL Script on Output Database

       The Run MySQL Script on Output Database menu option enables you to select from a
set of MySQL scripts to further process the MOVES output databases stored in the MySQL
database format. After selecting this menu option, click the arrow in the scroll down box to view
all the available scripts. Several scripts are distributed with MOVES (described in more detail
below). Select a post-processing script by clicking to highlight it. To execute the script, click the
OK button. The script will run on the output database that is selected in the General  Output panel
of the RunSpec.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                                               Page 83

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

       The first script, DecodeMOVESOutputsql, is an example script that decodes the
SourceUseType and FuelType fields from numerical code classification to the full text description.
The script produces two new output tables with the expanded text descriptions:
decodedmovesactivityoutput and decodedmovesoutput.

XCaution!  Note that the MOVES Decode script uses the default database supplied with
             MOVES to decode the numeric values in the tables. If the default database has
             been replaced, the Decode script will need to be modified with the new database
             name.

       A second script, TabbedOutput.sql, takes three MOVES MySQL output tables
(MOVESOutput, MOVESActivityOutput and MOVESRun) and converts them into tab-delimited
text files that can be read by a spreadsheet program such as Excel or Lotusl23. This is useful if
you do not want to work with the results in the MySQL relational database format. In MOVES,
this can also be done with the Summary Reporting feature. Both scripts work with Inventory
output, not Emission Rate output.

       A third script, EmissionRates.sql, divides the emission totals in the MOVESOutput table
by the distance traveled totals in the MOVESActivityOutput table. The resulting values are in
units of grams/vehicle-mile.  A rate will be produced for each line of output. Depending on what
was selected in the Output Emission  Detail panel of the RunSpec, this could be one aggregate rate,
or many disaggregate rates (e.g., one rate for each source type, fuel type, and model year). The
script produces a new table in the output database called emissionrates.

       The remaining scripts were developed to automate the process of calculating emission
factors for use in air quality modeling.  Once MOVES has been run at the project-level, the scripts
may be used to appropriately sum emissions from each of the relevant processes into one aggregate
link emission rate. For CO analyses, the following three scripts are available:
CO_Grams_Per_Hour.sql, CO_Grams_Per_Veh_Mile.sql, and
CO_CAL3QHC_EmissionFactors.sql.  Each script automates the post-processing steps
described in Section 2.5 of the EPA guidance document, "Using MOVES in Project-Level Carbon
Monoxide Analyses" (EPA420-B-10-041, December 2010). Depending on the purpose of the CO
analysis, you can choose to generate  link  specific emission rates for CO as either grams per hour or
grams per vehicle-mile. Additionally, a script is available that produces both free flow emission
rates (grams per vehicle-mile) and idle emission rates (grams per vehicle-hour) which may be used
in the CAL3QHC dispersion model.  Running a script will produce a table in the output database
that matches the name of the selected script (e.g., CO_grams_per_hour).

For PM analyses, the following four  scripts are available: PM25_Grams_Per_Veh_Mile.sql,
PM25_Grams_Per_Hour.sql, PM10_Grams_Per_Veh_Mile.sql, and
PM10_Grams_Per_Hour.sql. Each script automates the post-processing steps described in
Section 4.6 of the EPA guidance document: "Transportation Conformity Guidance for Quantitative
Hot-spot Analyses in PM2.5 and PMio Nonattainment and Maintenance Areas" (EPA420-B-10-040,
December 2010).  You can generate link-specific emission rates or PM2.s and PMio as either grams
per vehicle-mile or grams per hour, whichever may be needed for dispersion modeling. Running a
script will produce a table in the output database that matches the name of the selected script (e.g.,
PM25_grams_per_veh_mile).

Page 84                                              United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
               March 2012
Each script has limited error checking and you should ensure that you follow all recommendations
in the relevant EPA guidance document when running MOVES and executing a post-processing
script.
!Tip   The Run MySQL Script on Output Database Post Processing feature of MOVES also
       allows you to run user-created MySQL scripts. Each user-created post-processing script
       must be a text file containing Structured Query Language (SQL) commands, and
       containing a .SQL file extension. Detailed instructions on writing a MySQL script are
       beyond the scope of this document. To access a user-created script from the tool bar, the
       completed script must be saved to the OutputProcessingScripts subfolder of the Database
       subfolder of the MOVES program folder. In other words, the path should be similar to the
       following: C:\.. .\MOVES\Database\OutputProcessingScripts.
2.3.5.2 Produce Summary Report

       The Produce Summary Report menu option allows you to summarize and report the
output of one or more MOVES runs in a variety of ways.  Reports can be viewed on the screen,
printed, or saved in an ASCII text form that is easily imported into other software formats such as
Microsoft Excel. The Summary Reporter makes it easy to display and print summary reports of
MOVES Output information and convert them to ASCII text files.  For the Summary Reporter to
operate properly, the RunSpec which produced the output, or one sufficiently similar to it, needs to
be loaded in MOVES.
       When Produce Summary Report is selected and suitable RunSpec has been loaded, a
pop-up appears asking you to specify an emission process to be reported. The default option
(which is the only option if the run did not distinguish results by emission process) is to combine
the output results for all emission processes included in the RunSpec. But in many cases,  you will
want to select an emission process from the drop down list.
                          Emission Process Selection
                                  Select Emission Process to Report
                                  All Processes
                                  All Processes
                                  Extended Idle Exhaust
                                  Running Exhaust
                          County do Start Exhaust
de
       Clicking OK allows you to specify the content and level of report aggregation.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                     Page 85

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
     H Specify Parameters for Summary Report
                                    Specify Report for Emission Process: Total of All
     Report Description:

     Report Table Name:
               Sum maty Report
               SurnrnaryReport
                Run Number(s)
                                              Categories
       : 1 Time: 2012-02-02 10:02:27.0 examplecity_2013July
                                     yearlD
                                     sourceTypelD
                                     fuelTypelD
                                     MOVESRunlD
                                                                        Data Items
        Distance
        Methane (CH4)
        Nitrous Oxide (N2O)
        Total Energy Consumption
        Total Gaseous Hydrocarbons
                                           OK   Cancel
       This screen allows you to:

    1.  Give the report a title. The default title is "Summary Report", but you may change this in
    the text field.

    2. Specify the base portion of the table names which will be used to store various portions of
    the report. The default file name root is "Summary Report", but you should change this in the
    text field.

XCaution! Files which already have this base file name will be overwritten without warning if
            reports  are generated with the same base file name.

    3.  Select the Run Number(s), Categories, and Data Items to be reported.  The Add or Add All
       buttons may be used to select the Run Number(s), Categories and Data Items. Highlighting
       one entry and pressing the Add button will move the selected item to the Selection box
       below. Pressing the Add All button selects all items and moves them to the Selection box
       below. The order in the  Selection boxes for Categories and Data Items may be changed
       using the up and down arrows to the right of the Selection boxes. Similarly, the items in the
       Selection boxes may be removed by using the Remove or the Remove All buttons below
       the Selection boxes.

    4.  Choose the categories to be distinguished in the report.  At least one category must be
       selected. The category list is based on the run specification.  The fewer categories selected,
       the more aggregate the report will be.  Dimensions not distinguished when the run was
       made are not included. In this example, one category, MOVESRunID,  has been  selected.
Page 86
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                  March 2012
!Tip   If multiple runs are included in the report, you may wish to select the "MOVESRunID"
       category.  Otherwise, the results of the multiple runs will be combined in the report.
       Conversely, if only a single run is included in the report, there is little reason to select the
       MOVESRunID category

    5.  Select the data  items to be included in the report.  At least one data item besides Distance
       must be selected.

       In the following example, Run 1, Distance, Total Energy Consumption,  Total Gaseous
Hydrocarbons, and Methane have been selected.  These items will be reported by yearlD and
sourceTypelD and FuelTypelD.
     H Specify Parameters for Summary Report
                                     Specify Report for Emission Process: Total of All
     Report Description: Summary Report
     Report Table Name: SummaryReport
                 Pi in Number(s)
                                                Categories
                                                                           Data Items
      Run: 1 Time: 2012-02-02 10:02:27.0 examplecity_2013_july
                                       yearlD
                                       sourceTypelD
                                       fuelTypelD
                                       MOVESRunID
Distance
Methane (CH4)
Nitrous Oxide (N2O)
Total Energy Consumption
Total Gaseous Hydrocarbons
                  Selection
                                                                           Selection
      Run: 1 Time: 2012-02-02 10:02:27.0 examplecity_2013July
                                       yearlD
                                       sourceTypelD
                                       fuelTypelD
                                       MOVESRllllID
Distance
Methane (CH4)
Nitrous Oxide (N2O)
Total Energy Consumption
Total Gaseous Hydrocarbons
                                             OK   Cancel
XCaution! If the output data is disaggregated by day or hour, the output database will contain
             results for only two days in each month - a weekday (daylD 5) and a weekend-day
             (daylD 2). In this case, Summary Reporter should not be used to display results for a
             month or year, since the current code erroneously simply sums these two days
             together.  You should distinguish by daylD in the report and then externally weight
             the result according to the type of day to see meaningful result for a month (e.g. 22
             weekdays and 9 weekend-days in a 31-day month) or year (e.g. 261 weekdays and
             104 weekend-days in a 365-day year).

       In the example shown above, all report options have been selected.
       When OK is clicked, the screen report appears:
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                         Page 87

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
@ Screen Report fx"
| Header | Body | Decode

Year Source Fuel Run CH4
1999 11 1
1999 21 1
1999 21 2
1999 31 1
1999 31 2
1999 32 1
1999 32 2
1999 41 2
1999 42 1
1999 42 2
1999 42 3
1999 43 1
1999 43 2
1999 51 1
1999 51 2
1999 52 1
1999 52 2
1999 53 1
1999 53 2
1999 54 1
1999 54 2
1999 61 1
1999 61 Z
1999 62 2
2 874938816
2 88663293952
2 3619720
2 57848537088
2 24973050
2 21132898304
2 55232448
2 8842548
2 901927
2 3250926
2 5354938
2 486073664
2 8515191
2 13933925
2 6527126
2 9912993792
2 93257856
2 225449200
2 7795810
2 481020800
2 1654447
2 138056400
2 158135776
2 157552064

H20
54432328
59442847744
4495726
50761465856
30540892
16415342592
64629832
7004616
444902
2837879
7409710
65153484
9565705
4062813
5723209
1792169728
102186472
109511504
7923254
110433008
1552680
13394930
133902168
132880176
Save Print
TotalHC
27472619520
1598635769856
1675368960
901355667456
7075398656
290852929536
15077671936
2241533816
12170820
845418316
89545000
4372100096
1980975872
291842304
1808769408
72474992640
31260168192
2632124928
2214195712
7628037120
621737280
3020263168
44355325952
38234284032
Close
       Note that the report consists of three tabs: Header, Body, and Decode.  The Body tab is
the default view; the other tabs are accessed by clicking on them. The body of the report contains
columns for each of the category and data items selected.  Clicking on the Header tab displays the
report title,  date and time the report was made, several items of information about the run
specification, and the emission process covered by the report. Clicking on the Decode tab displays
the decoded numeric codes included in the report.
Page 88
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
       Screen Report
      Header  Body
      Category Field    Value Description
       sourceTypelD       11 Motorcycle
       sourceTypelD       21 Passenger Car
       sourceTypelD       31 Passenger Truck
       sourceTypelD       32 Light Commercial Truck
       sourceTypelD       41 Intercity Bus
       sourceTypelD       42 Transit Bus
       sourceTypelD       43 School Bus
       sourceTypelD       51 Refuse Truck
       sourceTypelD       52 Single Unit Short-haul Truck
       sourceTypelD       53 Single Unit Long-haul Truck
       sourceTypelD       54 Motor Home
       sourceTypelD       61 Combination Short-haul Truck
       sourceTypelD       62 Combination Long-haul Truck
         fuelTypelD       1 Sasoline
         fuelTypelD       2 Diesel Fuel
         fuelTypelD       3 Compressed Natural Gas (C1JC-)
                                         Save
                                               Print
                                                     Close
       When you are done viewing the screen report, click Save to save the report, Print to print
the report, or Close to close the Summary Reporter without printing.

XCaution!  The Summary Reporter does not store reporting options, other than the last report title
             and base file name used.  Because information is not remembered between Summary
             Reporter runs, you should not close the report until the user is done viewing it.

2.3.5.3 Produce State/County Map

       The Produce State/County Map menu option allows you to see the RunSpec output
depicted in color-coded or gray-scaled maps.  The maps can illustrate output at the county level,
and represent value ranges of a single numerical variable which can be selected from a list by the
user.  It should be noted that this is a very basic mapping tool with very specific input
requirements. For more sophisticated mapping options, you may want to apply GIS tools or other
software to the MOVES database output.

       For the Produce State/County Map tool to operate properly, the RunSpec which produced
the output, or one that points  to the same output file, needs to be loaded in MOVES.  When you
choose the Produce State/County Map menu option, the Generate State/County Map window
opens and displays the  name  of the source database for the map generation at the top of the
window.  (The source database for the map generation is the database containing the output of the
RunSpec.)
United States Environmental Protection Agency
       Page 89

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
El Generate State/County Map
Database: movestestresutts
Table:
movesoirtpiit
State or County FIPS Column:
countylD
)ata Column:
countylD
Cancel


T

T

T

"






Next>
       To view RunSpec output on a map, first choose a table contained in the output database
that has CountylD or StatelD as a column and associate each emission quantity with each county
or state selected only once. In other words, if there are multiple entries for the same pollutant in the
same county, then the Produce State/County Map tool cannot be used.  For example, if all 24
hours were modeled and the level of output detail was chosen to be Hour, then there are at least 24
values for each pollutant in each county and the MOVESOutput table cannot be used. It is
possible for the MOVESOutput table to be used if you have appropriately defined or aggregated
your RunSpec; however, it is more likely that you will have to use the Summary Reporter to
generate a table that fits the necessary criteria and save it into the output database indicated by the
currently loaded RunSpec.

       Once a table  with the attributes described above is created, it can be selected in the Table
drop-down menu.  The State or County FIPS Column box will be automatically populated with
CountylD or StatelD, instructing the mapping tool to consider output data at the county or state
level.  Next, specify data to depict by selecting an output parameter in the Data Column
dropdown menu.  By choosing a column from the selected table, you instruct the mapping tool to
use results from the RunSpec to generate the map output.  After making selections  in this window,
click Next.

       A window allowing you to define map attributes opens. You can choose Full Color or
Grayscale using the Colors drop-down box, and can customize the map using the  check boxes and
defining minimum and maximum data values for the emissions output data.  When you click Next,
the map output is generated.
Page 90
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                     March 2012
                                  Generate State/County Map
                               ;olors:
                               Full Color
                                * Show FIPS codes
                                •] Show legend colors
                                v Show legend text
                               dumber of colors: 16
                               Minimum Data Value:) 100
                               vl.iximum Data Value:
    30000
                                 
                                                                                     2907E4I

                                                                                     2.720E4I

                                                                                     2.533E4I

                                                                                     2.346E4I

                                                                                     2.159E4I

                                                                                     1.972E4

                                                                                     1.785E4

                                                                                     1.598E4

                                                                                     1.412E4

                                                                                     1.225E4I

                                                                                     1.03BE*!
                                                                                     B.641E3

                                                                                     4.772E3

                                                                                     2.903E3I

                                                                                     1.D34E3I
2.3.6 Tools

       Tools provides a drop-down menu with the choice Multiple RunSpec Creator, Process
Done Files and Database Converter.
                 MOVES - ID 6296247932789610114
               File  Edit  Pre Processing  Action  Post Processing
                  lools |  Settings  Help
                                                                Multiple RunSpec Creator
                                                                Process DONE Files
                                                                Database Converter
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                            Page 91

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

       This menu item contains a list of MOVES tools. Currently, the only tool on the list is the
Multiple RunSpec Creator, which creates a set of new MOVES RunSpec files using the currently
loaded RunSpec and a user-supplied control file as a template.

 2.3.6.1 Multiple RunSpec Creator

       The Multiple RunSpec Creator creates a set of new MOVES RunSpec files using the
currently loaded RunSpec information, and additional information in the form of a user-supplied
control file. The control file is a list of county, year and database data selections in the form of a
Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file (.xls). The tool produces a set of MOVES RunSpecs and a batch
(.BAT file) file that can execute the MOVES RunSpecs from the DOS command line (MOVES
batch files cannot be executed from inside the MOVES GUI).

       Before using the Multiple RunSpec Creator, load or create a viable (all green check
marks) Runspec (the tool will accept an incomplete RunSpec, but will subsequently generate a set
of incomplete RunSpecs which require further manual editing).  The Multiple RunSpec Creator
also requires the selection of at least one county and  one year in the RunSpec.

       If the menu item Multiple RunSpec Creator is selected, the Multiple RunSpec Creator
panel opens. The top of the panel contains some reminders about the purpose of the tool and
mentions the output .BAT file. Error messages and other feedback are provided in the messages
area at the bottom of the window.
Page 92                                              United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
  March 2012
          H Multiple RunSpec Creator
          Instructions
          This tool creates new RunSpec files using the currently loaded information as a template, making substitutions
          for county, year, and database selections driven by a user-supplied control file. In addition, a BAT file is generated
          that illustrates how to automatically execute each created RunSpec from the command line.

          Use the "Create Template..." button to get started with a control file that uses all the counties and years in the
          current RunSpec.

          The final BAT file, located in your output directory, can be run as is, or can be edited manually for distribution onto
          multiple MOVES master machines.
          RunSpec Template Control File
          File:
Browse...
                                                                               Create Template...
          File Name Prefix
          Prefix:
          RunSpec Output Directory
          Folder:
Browse...
         Messages:
                          Create FtunSpecs
        Done
        Once the panel is opened, use the Create Template button to get started with a Control
File that uses all the counties and years in the current RunSpec.  The Create Template feature will
fill the Control Filecf with the information available in the RunSpec.  However, you may edit the
Control Filecf and add additional rows and columns of information.  You may add additional
counties, years and database names. For each row in the Control Filecf MOVES will create a new
RunSpec.
        The figure below shows a template Control File (an .XLS in this case) that will create
RunSpecs for a list of counties, each with a different output database:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A
CountylD
26161
B
County Description
MICHIGAN - Washtenaw County
26163 MICHIGAN - Wayne County
26161
26163
26161
26163
MICHIGAN - Washtenaw County
MICHIGAN- Wayne County
MICHIGAN - Washtenaw County
MICHIGAN- Wayne County
C D
E
Year Additional Tent Name Primary MOVES DB
2009 Washtenaw MOVESDB20D90112
20D9 Wayne MOVESDB20D90112
2010 Washtenaw MOVESDB20090112
2010 Wayne
2011 Washtenaw
2011 Wayne
MOVESDB20090112
MOVESDB20090112
MOVESDB20090112
F
Output DB
WashtenawOutput
WayneOutput
WashtenawOutput
WayneOutput
WashtenawOutput
WayneOutput
G H I
Domain DB Advanced Features DB User DB


















United States Environmental Protection Agency
          Page 93

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
       If the National SCALE is selected, a set of RunSpecs will be generated for unique
       combinations of county, year and additional text name.  Information from the other
       columns will be inserted into the RunSpecs. If the County or Project SCALE is selected,
       a set of RunSpecs will be generated only for unique combinations of county and year.
       Note, in all three cases, you must separately create the required input databases.
       The Control File fields are:
Field
CountylD
County
Description
Year
Additional Text
Name
Primary MOVES
DB
Output DB
Domain DB
Advanced
Features DB
User DB
Notes
Mandatory. The FIPS ID of the county or custom domain (generic county) in the format 99999
Describes the county. This is not mandatory but is helpful as it gets stored within each RunSpec. It
will be the label for the generic county if the Custom Domain option is used.
Mandatory. A year contained within the current MOVES default database, typically 1990 and 1999-
2050 inclusive.
Optional, 20 characters max. Additional text to be included in both the file name of a RunSpec file
and in the RunSpec description (which gets stored to the output database during simulation). Since
this field is used as part of a file name, it cannot contain operating system special characters such as
&:/\*?
Name of the primary MOVES database to be used with the RunSpec. If blank, the created RunSpec
will use the "Custom Input Database" (as set on the Advanced Performance Features panel) of the
current RunSpec, and if that is blank the created RunSpec will use the MOVES default database
configured at the time it is executed. This input will never change the name of the Default Database
in the MOVES Configuration File as shown in the pull down menu item "Settings - Configure
MOVES".
Name of the database to store the created RunSpec output. If blank, the created RunSpec will use the
output database of the currently loaded RunSpec, and if that is blank an error message will be shown
and processing stopped.
When using County or Project domains, MOVES requires an input database specific to the domain.
If blank, the model will use the database named in the RunSpec. If neither is available, an error
message will be shown and processing stopped.
If the "Copy Saved Generator Data" checkbox is marked on the Advanced Performance Features
panel, this field specifies the database where the data should be saved.
The MOVES GUI allows users to supply their own custom data using the Manage Input Data Sets
panel. On that panel, zero or more user databases are listed. Such databases can be specified in the
Control File in the User DB column and the columns to the right of it. For example, if two databases
are desired, fill the User DB column with the first database, and fill the next column with the second.
MOVES places no limit on the number of such user databases.
       After successfully creating a template file, populating the file and saving it as a Control
File, return to the Multiple RunSpec Creator panel and browse for and select the Control File.
The name of the Control File will be echoed in the Multiple RunSpec Creator panel to the left of
the first Browse button.
       The next step is to enter a file name prefix in the File Name Prefix box. This input is a
mandatory, 150 character limit field that gives a prefix to the file name of each created RunSpec
and .BAT file. Good usage of this field, perhaps with a project number or metropolitan area name,
will help preserve the usefulness of the created RunSpecs.
       After setting a prefix, use the second Browse button for an output directory to hold the
created RunSpecs and .BAT file. Remember that many files may be created, so it may be best to
create a new directory to hold the new files.
Page 94
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

       The Create RunSpecs button will check input values (control file name, file prefix, and
output directory), read the control file, report errors, and if there are no errors, create the BAT and
RunSpec files. Files are only generated if there are no errors.

       As an example, using the above control file and a prefix of "Test", the files created are:


                                         j£] Test_26161_2009_Washtenaw.mrs
                                         |^j Test_26161_2010_Washtenaw.mrs
                                         j£J Test_26161_201 l_Washtenaw.mrs
                                         j£] Test_26163_2009_Way ne. mrs
                                         kl] Test_26163_201Q_Wayne.mrs
                                         cr] Test_26163_201 l_Wayne.mrs
                                         ^ Test_ExecuteRun5pecs.bat


       As can be seen, the naming convention is:

              __[_] .mrs

              _ExecuteRunSpecs.bat
 ^ Note  If RunSpecs are for the same county and year, it is important that the additional text be

         unique, otherwise, not all listed RunSpecs will be created.


       The resulting BAT file from the example file is:

       @echo off
       rem Script generated by  the MOVES Looping Tool
       rem Based on control file:
       C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\Task910LoopingTool\ControlFile.xls
       rem	
       rem Command Line Notes:
       rem "-e DEBUG" logs  all  types of messages to MOVESbatch.log
       rem	
       echo Changing to the MOVES folder and compiling code...
       C:
       cd "C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource"
       call setenv.bat
       call ant compile
       rem	
       echo Running Test_26161_2009_Washtenaw.mrs
       Java gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine -e DEBUG -r
       "C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\Task910LoopingTool\Test_26161_2009_Washtenaw.mrs"
       echo Running Test_26163_2009_Wayne.mrs
       Java gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine -e DEBUG -r
       "C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\Task910LoopingTool\Test_26163_2009_Wayne.mrs"
       echo Running Test_26161_2010_Washtenaw.mrs
       Java gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine -e DEBUG -r
       "C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\Task910LoopingTool\Test_26161_2010_Washtenaw.mrs"
       echo Running Test_26163_2010_Wayne.mrs
       Java gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine -e DEBUG -r
       "C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\Task910LoopingTool\Test_26163_2010_Wayne.mrs"
       echo Running Test_26161_2011_Washtenaw.mrs
       Java gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine -e DEBUG -r
       "C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\Task910LoopingTool\Test_26161_2011_Washtenaw.mrs"
       echo Running Test_26163_2011_Wayne.mrs
       Java gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine -e DEBUG -r
       "C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\Task910LoopingTool\Test_26163_2011_Wayne.mrs"


       This .BAT file can be run as is (via the command line or by double-clicking), or can be

edited manually for distribution onto multiple MOVES master machines.



United States Environmental Protection Agency                                                   Page 95

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

2.3.6.2 Process DONE Files

      The tool Process DONE Files is an advanced MOVES2010b tool that is not recommended
for use by most users. The interested user should completely read Configuring MOVES -
Appendix J before attempting to use this tool.
2.3.6.3 Database Converter

       The structure of the county data manager and project data manager input databases are
slightly different between MOVES2010a and MOVES2010b.  To facilitate the migration of user
work from MOVES2010a to MOVES2010b, a conversion tool has been developed. This new tool
can be accessed in the MOVES Main Menu under the drop down menu item Tools - Database
Converter.

       A conversion script was created to convert MOVES2010a county and project domain
databases to MOVES2010b format. This script is located under the database\ConversionScripts
directory and is named Convert2010A_CDM_PDM.sql. This  is the default script and the tool
automatically selects it.

 XCaution!    The GUI contains a Browse button that enables you to search and select an
               alternate conversion script file.  This was done for future capability when more
               than one conversion script may be available.  It is strongly recommended that you
               do not Browse and use an alternative conversion script for MOVES2010b.

       The Input Database and the New Database boxes are required entries.  The name of the
MOVES2010a county or project database is entered in the Input Database box. The name of the
MOVES2010b county or project database is entered in the New Database box.  After these inputs
are made, press Convert Database. This tool will create a new county or project input database,
copy the contents of the MOVES2010a county or project database to the new county or project
database, and make all  necessary structural and data changes to the new database so that it runs on
MOVES2010b.

       If you have many county or project databases to convert, an Ant command line tool is
available to run any conversion script. It must be presented with a MOVES2010a county or
project input database, the name of a new database to be created, and the name of the conversion
script to be run. An example command line is:

ant -Dinput=2010Ainput -Doutput=2010Binput -Dscript=Convert2010A_CDM_PDM.sql convert
Page 96                                              United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                                                 March 2012
    Convert Database
  Instructions
  This tool converts MOVES 201OA County Domain and Project Domain databases into the MOVES201 OB format.

  Use the "Browse" button to select a database conversion script file, such as the standard file
  Convert2010A_CDM_PDM.sql located in the database/ConversionScripts directory.

  Select a MOVES 201 OA County Domain or Project Domain database as the "Input Database". This database
  must be on the same server as the MOVES 201 OB default database in order for the script to copy required data.

  Enterthe name of a new database to receive the converted data as the "New Database".

  Use the "Convert Database" button to execute the script file.  When youVe converted all the databases you care
  to, click"Done".
  Conversion Script
  File:
                             Convert2010A_CDM_PDM.sql
Browse..
  Databases
  Server:

  Input Database:

  New Database:
localhost
    Refresh
examplecity_2013 July_in
nuCity
  i/lessages:
  WARNING: custom county 99001 requires data in the sccRoadTypeDistribution table to obtain SCC results.
  Conversion successful.
                   Convert Database
                                                                       Done
2.3.7 Settings

       The Settings menu includes one option, Configure MOVES.  This menu option allows
you to set the basic MOVES operating configuration.
                MOVES - C:\Epa\MovE5WOVESGHGSourceUiAOVES2QQ9Exarnple.mrs - ID 45657980!
             File  Edit  Pre Processing  Action  Post Processing  Tools
                                                   Settings  Help
                                                                     gl Confiflure MOVES...
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                                                        Page 97

-------
March 2012
                                        MOVES2010b User Guide
2.3.7.1 Configure MOVES
     Configure MOVES
      Default Input Database
      Server:
localhost
      Default Database: movesghgsourceA
      Default Output Database
      Server: localhost
      Shared Distributed Folder Path
       C:\EPA\MOVES\movesghgsourcea\SharedWork
       First, specify the default input database by identifying the default server on which the
MOVES input database is stored and the name of the default database.  In most cases, "localhost"
(the MySQL data folder on your own machine) is the desired server, although you may input an
alternate. Next, choose from a drop-down list to define the default database to be used as a data
source for the MOVES RunSpec.  In most cases, you will choose the default database distributed
with MOVES. You can also select a server to house the default output database server under the
Settings-^Configure menu option; "localhost" is appropriate in most cases.  The actual output
database file is named on the General Output panel to specify output parameters as part of the
MOVES RunSpec setup process.

XCaution!    If the Default Input Database is changed, the program  should be stopped and
              restarted. This is because the user interface program will have already connected to
              the previously specified database in order to construct the GUI displays; thus the
              GUI may not match the new input database.

       Using the Settings menu option, you can also identify the Shared Distributed Folder
Path for the MOVES Worker and MOVES Master program modules.  This is the Windows folder
where all intermediate and internal MOVES work files are stored during processing. This folder is
installed as part of the MOVES program installation. Browse your system to find where this folder
was installed and indicate  the exact location.  It may not be the same path as  shown in the example
above.

!Tip By changing the Shared Distributed Folder Path, you can take  advantage of distributed
     processing by having the master and multiple worker computers on the same network "point"
     to a drive and folder that is accessible to all the computers involved.
Page 98
                               United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                     March 2012
2.3.8 Help

       Help provides access to .pdf versions of the MOVES User Guide and supplies general
information about the version of MOVES being used.
    MOVES - ID 7250826382608025992
  File  Edit Pre Processing Action  Post Processing Tools  Settings
Help
                                                            MOVES User's Guide
                                                            About MOVES...
       Choose MOVES User Guide to open the document in .pdf format.

       Choose About MOVES in the Help menu to obtain the release date of the model.  This
indicates which version of MOVES is open. In addition to the version, the EPA copyright and
GNU General Public License (GPL) information is provided.  The GNU license grants the user,
free of charge, complete access to the object and source code of the MOVES program for personal
use.  For specific details regarding the GNU license, consult the website
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
              About MOVES2010b
                      MOVES2010b
                      This version:
                      Computer ID:
                      Copyright U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                      Licensed for use pursuant to the GNU General Public License (GPL)
                      For information about the GPL see http://www.gnu.org1icenses/
                                            OK
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                            Page 99

-------

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

Appendix A - Using MOVES to Generate Lookup Tables

       MOVES can calculate emission inventories (in total quantity of emissions for a given
time) or emission rates (emissions divided by distance or population), depending on the selection
of Inventory or Emission Rates in the Calculation Type section of the Scale panel

       When modeling a single time and place, the emission rate calculations in MOVES are
significantly more time consuming and require more computer memory than inventory
calculations.  However, for large scale projects, you may want to use the emission rate
calculations to create a lookup table of rates that—though a post-processor—can be applied to
many times and places, thereby reducing total MOVES run time.  Successful  application of this
approach requires a clear understanding of the rates calculations in MOVES and careful
planning. EPA is developing tools to automate the use of this feature to create inputs for EPA's
Sparse Matrix Operator Kernel Emissions (SMOKE) model. This section describes the process
more generally.

Defining a Scenario

       A scenario defines the set of conditions to which the emission rates may be applied. A
scenario typically defines a specific fuel mix and set of Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs.
It also assumes a certain pattern of trip activity (number of trips per vehicle per day and the
distribution of those trips in time).

       Some characteristics of the scenario depend on your choices. If a given age distribution
is part of the scenario definition, that is, if the lookup table is to be applied only to areas with one
particular age distribution, the lookup output can be smaller because you do not need output by
model year.  On the other hand, detailing output by model year allows you to apply the lookup
table to areas with diverse age distributions.

       A scenario generally does not imply specific temperatures or speed distributions. Instead,
these characteristics are key fields in the output used to match the emission rate with the
appropriate vehicle activity.

The Emission Rate Output Tables

       Selecting Emission Rates on the Scale panel populates three additional output tables:
RatePerDistance, RatePerVehicle and RatePerProfile.  The RatePerDistance table stores
emission rates for emissions that occur while a vehicle is in regular operation. The
RatePerVehicle and RatePerProfile tables store emissions that occur while a vehicle is
stationary, on "off network" roadtypes.  The latter two tables differ because the emissions in the
RatePerVehicle depend on the hour and the temperature while emissions in the RatePerProfile
table also depend on temperatures in previous hours.

       The following table explains which tables will get results (emission rates)  when particular
emission processes are selected.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                              Page A-l

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
processID
1
2
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
90
processName
Running Exhaust
Start Exhaust
Brakewear
Tirewear
Evap Permeation
Evap Fuel Vapor Venting
Evap Fuel Leaks
Crankcase Running Exhaust
Crankcase Start Exhaust
Crankcase Extended Idle Exhaust
Refueling Displacement Vapor Loss
Refueling Spillage Loss
Extended Idle Exhaust
Emission Rate Table
RatePerDi stance
RatePerVehicle
RatePerDi stance
RatePerDi stance
RatePerDi stance/RatePerVehicle/
RatePerProfile
RatePerProfile/RatePerDistance
RatePerDi stance/RatePer Vehicle/
RatePerProfile
RatePerDi stance
RatePerVehicle
RatePerVehicle
RatePerDi stance/RatePer Vehicle
RatePerDi stance/RatePer Vehicle
RatePerVehicle
       1) RatePerDistance: Includes emissions for the processes that occur while vehicles are
operating: running exhaust (includes emissions during normal idle at traffic signals, etc), tire
wear, brake wear, evaporative permeation, evaporative fuel vapor venting, evaporative fuel
leaks, crankcase running exhaust, refueling displacement and refueling spillage. The hour, day
and month will not be relevant for most uses because the emissions are normalized with regard to
activity.  For national and county level runs, roadtype and avgspeedbin will be relevant. For
project-level runs, linkID will be important.
       Fields:
             MOVESScenarioID
             MOVESRunID
             yearlD
             monthID
             daylD
             hourlD
             linkID
             pollutantID
             processID
             sourceTypelD
             sec
             fueltype ID
             model year ID
             roadtype ID
             avgSpeedBinID
             temperature
             relhumidity
             RatePerDi stance
Page A-2
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

       2) RatePerVehicle:  Includes emissions for most processes that occur while vehicles are
stationary:  start exhaust, start crankcase, permeation, liquid leaks, and extended idle (long haul
combination trucks only). The month will not be relevant for most uses since, in rate
calculations, it serves primarily as an identifier for the fuel mix and will be redundant with
MOVESScenarioID, but daytypeid and hourid are important key fields since start and other
activity vary per vehicle per hour.

       Fields:
             MOVESScenarioID
             MOVESRunID
             yearlD
             monthID
             daylD
             hourlD
             zonelD
             pollutantID
             processID
             sourceTypelD
             sec
             fueltype ID
             model year ID
             temperature
             RatePerVehicle
       3) RatePerProfile:  Includes emissions from the vapor venting process when vehicles
are stationary.  The daytypeid, hourid and temperatureprofileid are important key fields because
the vapor venting emissions vary depending on activity and previous temperatures.

       Fields:
             MOVES Scenario ID
             MOVESRunID
             TemperatureProfilelD
             yearlD
             daylD
             hourlD
             pollutantID
             processID
             sourceTypelD
             sec
             fueltypelD
             modelyearlD
             temperature
             RatePerVehicle
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                              Page A-3

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
Setting Up Runs to Generate a Lookup Table

       Setting up an emission rate lookup table for a single scenario requires a number of steps.

       1) Define the scenario, and determine the counties, months, years and day-types in which
it applies. Using the County Data Manager, you can set up a run for the desired county, year,
fuel supply, age distribution and I/M program.

       2) Determine the temperatures and temperature profiles to be covered by the lookup
table. A "temperature profile" is a set of 24 temperatures over the course of a day. If modeling
NOx, it may also make sense to include relative humidity as a variable.
                            Example Temperature Profiles
    0)
    Q.

    0)
                                   10          15
                                    Hour of Day
       20
       3) Determine which pollutants and processes are of interest. Note that the modeling of
hydrocarbons is more complicated than the modeling of other pollutants due to the need to
include evaporative processes, and thus the need to represent temperature profiles as well as
hourly temperatures.

       4) Organize inputs to generate the most rates in the shortest total runtime, while
maintaining a manageable output size. If multiple similar calculations are required, it is
generally a good idea to combine them in the same run. However, due to the different
requirements for different emission processes, redundant calculations can often be avoided by
splitting the task into multiple runs.

          a.  For running exhaust, crankcase running exhaust, and refueling, hour doesn't
             matter, so 24 temperatures can be modeled as different hours in a single month. If
             more than 24 distinct temperatures are to be modeled,  additional temperatures can
Page A-4
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

             be modeled using additional months (as long as the fuel characteristics are set to
             be the same for each month). If this approach is used, the month field in the
             output essentially becomes a label for a group of temperatures, and does not
             represent an actual calendar month.

          b.  For start, crankcase start exhaust, liquid leaks and evaporative permeation, hour
             and temperature matter.  Sets of temperatures can be entered as individual
             "months".  Again, this creates output where "month" represents a group of
             temperatures rather than a calendar month. In the illustration above, the three
             temperature profiles could be modeled  in a single run as three nominal months,
             one for each profile. Note, however, that Profile 3 shares an hour/temperature
             point with the each of the other profiles (in hour 8 and hour 15). For a lookup
             table with greater scope, it could be efficient to design the runs to eliminate such
             redundancy.

          c.  Vapor venting emissions depend on hour, temperature and previous temperatures.
             For these emissions, we must model each profile as a separate month.  Thus,
             within a given MOVES Scenario, monthid becomes equivalent to
             temperatureprofileid. In some cases, it may be appropriate to "bin" similar
             temperature profiles and to apply the results from one profile to a group of similar
             profiles.

       Temperatures (and humidities) can be entered into the MOVES ZoneMonthHour table,
using MySQL commands or through the County Data Manager (see Meteorology Data
Importer - Section 2.3.3.4.1  for more information on entering this data).
 7 Note While activity is "divided out" in the Emission Rates output, the amount of time spent
        driving affects the evaporative emission rates. Therefore, it is important to input
        realistic VMT, Population, Average Speed Distribution and Road Type Distribution
        information.

Running MOVES to generate Lookup Tables

       MOVES can generate lookup table output using the menu-driven interface, but for large-
scale modeling, you will probably want to automate execution of a series of runs. See Running
MOVES from the Command Line - Appendix C and Multiple Run Spec Creator  - Section
2.3.6.1 for information on a tool for creating a set of similar RunSpecs.

Applying MOVES Emission Rate Output

   To calculate an emissions inventory from emission rate output, rates in RatePerDistance
values need to be multiplied by the appropriate Vehicle Miles Travelled (VMT), and rates in
RatePerVehicle and RatePerProfile must be multiplied by appropriate vehicle population values.
Doing this correctly can require a number of considerations.

   1)  Rather than simply summing all activity in a speed or temperature bin, it is usually
       appropriate to do an interpolation as the rates are applied. For example, to calculate the

United States Environmental Protection Agency                                              Page A-5

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

       total emissions from 100 miles of VMT with an average speed of 17.6 mph, a simplistic
       approach would be to multiply all of the VMT by the emission rate for speed bin 5 (17.5
       mph-22.5 mph), however this approach is overly sensitive to even very small changes in
       speed.  To reduce these boundary issues, instead interpolate between speed bins (in this
       example, between the rates for speed bin 4 (12.5-17.5) and speed bin 5) based on the
       average speeds for those speed bins.

   2)  Depending on how the runs were organized, take care not to double-count emissions with
       duplicate emission rates (e.g. if the three profiles illustrated above were each modeled as
       independent months, there would be duplicate values in the ratepervehicle table for Sam
       at 34F, and for 3pm at 87F). A simple join of the rates and population table using hour
       and temperature would create extra rows that you would need to be careful not to include
       in a sum.

   3)  Be aware that evaporative emissions are stored in all three tables, and all three need to be
       used to fully account for evaporative emissions that occur during both driving and
       parking. The rates in RatePerDistance  need to multiplied by the appropriate VMT,  and
       the rates in RatePerVehicle and RatePerProfile need to be multiplied by the appropriate
       population. They can then be summed  to calculate the total emissions.
Page A-6                                               United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
Appendix B - Working with the MySQL Data

Appendix Bl - Linking To MySQL Tables from MS OFFICE 2007

       This appendix describes in detail how the user can transform MOVES MySQL tables into
Microsoft ACCESS 2007 database tables or Microsoft Excel 2007 spreadsheets.  This may be
useful for those who wish to view or manipulate these tables in an alternate format. This
appendix also explains how to use the Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) interface protocols
and tools.

Adding a MySQL database as an ODBC User Data Source

    1.  Install MySQL driver, MyODBC-3.51.06.exe. This is part of the normal MOVES
       installation process  and can be done by executing the MOVES2010b Installation Suite
        MOVES Installation Suite
                                                                              -  n x
         fcy. u * §•    MOVES2010b Installation Suite (for 32/64-bit Windows)

       * Use 'Main Screen'to (un)install all MOVES components. Or alternatively go through tabs 1 to 6 to (un)install each individual component.
Main Screen
(Install All)
MOVES ;
MOVES Co
1 . Install Java
Only
System Inform
mponent i
2. Remove
Old MySQL

3tatus
Core Components:
Java 1.7.0: Installed
MySQL 5. 5. 12: Installed
MySQL Data: Installed
MOVES201urj App.: Unknown
MOVES Database: Unknown
Optional Components:
Query Browser: installed
Workbench 5.2 Installed
MySQL ODBC: Installed
Old Components (Recommended tc
Windows System Information:
Windows XP 32 Bit, version: 5.1
CPU: 586; 8 processor(s); total




3. Setup
MySQL Only

4. Install
MOVES Only

Install Location



5. Install
QB/WB Only
6. Install
ODBC Onh

Help / Contact
f Info

Action
Refresh
C:\Program FilesUava\jdk1.7.0
C:\Program FilesWIySQLiMySQL Server 5.5
Help
Help
Erint View
Reinstall
Remove
C:\Docurnents and SettingslAII UsersWpplication DatalMy£|
Unknown
Unknown

C:\Program Files'lMySQL'iMySQL Tools for 5.0
C:\Program FilesWIySQLAMySQL Workbench 5.2 CE
SOFTWAREWIySQLAB\MySQLConnectorroDBC5.1
Be Removed):
Help |
Find it |
Help |
Help
Install
Run MOVES |
Remove |
Remove |
install |
Remove MySQL 5.0 | Remove MySQL 5.1 |



2; C:\WINDOWS
memory: 3326 MB; available memory: 1972 MB




* This Suite invokes DOS screens to perform necessary tasks during installation; please disregard all popup DOS screens.


Exit Suite
   2.  Create an ODBC data source with the same name as the folder which corresponds to the
       MySQL database.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
      Page B-l

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
       a.   In the Control Panel, select Administrative Tools:
Ca Control Panel
File Edit View Favorites Tools Help if m
•+ - fta
^Search i^j Folders g&
QI J
A.
[&] Accessibility Options Customizes accessibility Features For your computer
'^y Add/Remove Hardware Installs, removes, and troubleshoots hardware
•2TT| Add/Remove Programs Installs and removes programs and Windows components
ftQ . • , • • •:•:.; ConFigures administrative settings For your computer
^ Automatic Updates
M^BDE Administrator
!|JjjG Date/Time
$$ Display
*Ji Find Fast
'-Hj1 Folder Options
j^^t Gaming Options
^Internet Options
ConFigures Automatic Updates 	 I
ConFigures the Borland Database Engine
Sets the date, time, and time zone For your computer
Customizes your desktop display and screen saver
MicrosoFt Find Fast (trn) content indexer
Customizes the display oF
Files and Folders, changes File a, . .
Displays and manages Fonts on your computer
Adds, removes, or changes settings For game controllers
ConFigure your Internet display and connection settings. •" I
ConFigures administrative settings for your computer
       b.  In the Administrative Tools menu, select Data Sources (ODBC):
f?l Administrative Tools
File Edit View Favorites Tools Help

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
              March 2012
        c   In the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog choose to Add a User Data
            Source.
                 User DSN  j System DSN ]  File DSN ]  Drivers ] Tracing j Connection Pooling ]  About

                  User Data Sources:
                   Name
                                1 Driver-
                   rnovesdb       MySQL ODBC 3.51 Driver
                  l.'.f.WJJJjJJJIUmi MySQL ODBC 3.51 Driver
                   rnyodbc3-test    MySQL ODBC 3.51 Driver
Remove
                                                                            Configure...
                           An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to
                           the indicated data provider.  A User data source is only visible to you.
                           and can only be used on the current machine.
                                         OK
                                                     Car-
                                                                                 Help
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                     Page B-3

-------
March 2012
           MOVES2010b User Guide
       d.  The New Data Source should use the MySQL ODBC Driver that was installed earlier.
           Scroll through the list until the MySQL ODBC 3.51 Driver is found, click it, and
           click Finish.
             Create New Data Source
                                    Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source.
Name
Microsoft Paradox Driver (*.db )
Microsoft Paradox-Treiber (x.db )
Microsoft Text Driver (K.txt; x.csv)
Microsoft Text-Treiber (K.txt; K.csvJ
Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver
Microsoft Visual FoxPro-Treiber
iMuhul ODBC 3.51 Dflvei I
Oracle ODBC Driver
SQLServer
V*
4.
4.
4.
4.
6.
6.
3.
8.
'"' T
±r
                                                        i|    Finish   I     Cancel   i
       e.  Next, the database links need to be defined.  The values shown below are for a
           database called "movesdefault".  The database name should be the name of the folder
           which contains the desired MySQL database files (i.e., the MySQL database name).
      Connector/ODBC 3.51.25 - Add Data Source Nome
                  Connector/ODBC
     Login    Connect Options    Advanced
       Data Source Name  movesdefault
       Description       Current database
       Server
       User
       Password
       Database
                      movesdefault
                                                    Connector/ODBC Configuration
                                                    This dialog is used to add a Data Source Name
                                                    (DSN).
                          Test     Diagnostics »
                                                           Ok
                                                                      Cancel
                                                                                   Help
Page B-4
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                                                       March 2012
       f  Once the database name and the data source name list an existing MySQL database
          name, the database connection can be checked by clicking Test.
                                Connector/ODBC
                                     Success; connection was made!
g.
          The added data source will show up in the list of data sources in the ODBC Data
          Source Administrator dialog.  This will finish the process of creating a new ODBC
          data source associated with a particular MySQL database.
            "'' ODBC Data Source Administrator
            UserDSN
                      System DSN  FileDSN   Drivers  Tracing  Connection Pooling

Jser Data Sources:
Name
19SQNOX MOVES Out
dBASE Files
EmFlatesByAge
Excel Files
MOVESDB200S112
• Imovesdefault I

MS Access Database


Driver Add.

I
MySQL ODBC 3.51 Driver
M icrosof t dB ase D river (*. dbf ) R ernove
MySQL ODBC 3.51 Driver
Microsoft Excel Driver (K.xls) Configu
hHnCm nnpr o KI nr;..,ar
My o ij L u u D L- -j. o i u river
MySQL ODBC 3. 51 Driver
Microsoft Access Driver (K.mdb)

/^SJl An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect tc
(jWjj the indicated data provider. A User data source is only visible to you,
^^ and can only be used on the current machine.


re...



)

                                              Cancel
                                                   Apply
Help
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                                                             Page B-5

-------
March 2012
                                 MOVES2010b User Guide
Using Microsoft Access with MySQL Tables

    1.  Run an Access .mdb (either a new one or an existing one).

    2.  On the top menu bar, look for menu items External Data, More, then ODBC Database,
       then Link Tables ... (see picture below).  Click on the item Link Tables...
                                              Table Tools  M o vest es Re suits : Database (Access 2007) - Microsoft Access
                  Fable!

                    Tabtel: Table
MTML Document
Import or link to an HTML
Document
Outlook Folder
Import or link to an Outlook
foldsr
dBASE File
Page B-6
                      United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                  March 2012
    3.   On the pop-up window like the one shown below, choose Link to the datasource by
         creating a linked table.
                         Select the source and destination of the data
                         Specify how and where you want to store the data in the current database.
                             If the specified object does not exist, Access will create it. If the specified object already exists, Access will append a number to the
                             name of the imported object. Changes made to source objects [including data in tables) will not be reflected in the current database.

                           O Unk to the data source by creating a linked table,
                             Access will create a table that will maintain a link to the source data, Changes made to the data in Access will be reflected in the
                             source and vice versa.
    4.   Another pop-up window similar to the one below will appear. Click on the tab Machine
         Data Source, to select a database of interest.
                           Select Data Source
                             File Data Source I Machine Data Source I
El®
                              Lookjn:  | Data Sources
                              DSN Name:
                                                                              New...
                               Select the file data souice that describes the driver that you wish to connect to.
                               You can use any file data source that refers to an ODBC driver which is installed
                               on your machine.
                                                          OK.    |    Cancel       Help
         In this example movestestresults is chosen from the Data Source Name column.  Select
         OK to load the data into Access.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                          Page B-7

-------
March 2012
                                                              MOVES2010b User Guide
                             A Machine Data Source is specific to this machine, and cannot be shared.
                             "User" data sources are specific to a user on this machine. "System" data
                             sources can be used by all users on this machine, or by a system-wide service.
                                                 OK
                                                         Cancel      Help
    5.
If the Data Source Name of the file is not listed, you must follow the instructions
provided in the section, How to create a DSN Connection to a MySQL database,
presented later in this appendix.

Once the data is loaded into access, the Link Tables window shown below will appear.
This screen displays all of the database tables that are visible in Access. Select the tables
to view, and click the OK button.
Link Tables [?]fx]


Fables

actcornp_10_12_Famid4 A
actcornp_l l_12_Famid4
actcornp_l 3_1 2_Famid4
actcornp 33 36 Famid4
actcornp_34_36_Famid4
actcomp 35 36 Famid4
actcornp 37 36 Famid4
actcomp_45_2 1 _ref lex
actcomp_9_l 2_f amid4
activitytype
bundletracking
distcomp_23_24_famid7
distcomp_47_23_reflex
distcomp_47_48_farnid7
distcomp_48_24_reflex
durationinfo
movesactivitycomparison
rnovesactivitycomparison_short
movesactivityoutput
moveserror
moveseventlog
movesoutput
movesoutputcornparison short
imovesrun j
movestablesused
movesworkersused
outcornp_l 0_1 2_Famid4
outcomp_l l_12_Famid4





OK

Cancel

Select All

Deselect All
HI Save password

Page B-8
                                                   United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
       For each table selected, choose the fields that uniquely identify the records in the table.
Select Unique Record Identifier 1 ? I|X|
Fields in table 'movesactivityoutput':
llMOVESRunib
iterationID
yearlD
rnonthlD
daylD
hourlD
statelD
countylD
zonelD
linkID
sourceTypelD
fuelTypelD
	 ! A





V
To ensure data integrity and to update records, you must
choose a field or fields that uniquely identify each record,
Select up to ten fields.
[ OK ,
Cancel

       In the screenshot shown below, three tables have been shown to work with in MS Access:
baseyearvmt, county, and state. The user can now work with these tables in MS Access.

XCaution!  Edits made to the tables or data in MS Access will not affect the original MySQL
             tables and cannot be used directly in MOVES.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
      Page B-9

-------
March 2012
           MOVES2010b User Guide







Tn LL! "" ~ ;
Saved Access Excel SharePoint J
Imports List More- E.ma,| Repiiei
bsport Collect Data
outputTimei - timeUnits - distancelini- -
':' i:" -- =w|
31
Move to
Ortlme SharePoint
massUnns - energyUnits - runSpecFilel - I
25 Hour hour mi lg KJ Task208Base
26 Hour our mi
27 Hour our mi
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Hour our mi
Hour our mi
Hour our mi
Hour our mi
Hour our mi
Hour hour mi
37 Hour hour mi
38 Hour hour mi
39 Hour hour mi
40 Hour hour mi
41 Hour hour mi
42 Hour hour mi
43 Hour hour mi
44 Hour hour mi
45 Hour hour mi
46 Month month mi
47 Hour hour mi
48 Hour hour mi
49

Record: l< < 49of<
Datasheet View
Hour hour mi
g KJ Task208Reduc€
g KJ Task209Base
g KJ Task209Reduc4
g KJ Task212Base
g KJ Task212LLRedu
g KJ Task212PermRi
g KJ T3sk214BRPMR
g KJ Task214BWPMI
g KJ Task214Base

runSpecDesi - runSpecFilel - runDateTimi • ' scale
Base test for st t!tttit>ttnwwwH nntitti'i'ttnntntm inv
Task 209 Base F WMltlttUMUim miWtitMlMim Inv




BWPM reduce: w##s#w###w? tfnmitin'rnnmm inv
g KJ Task214TWPMI TWPM reducec Wliutmwum trvmvnmiWim Inv
g KJ Task216Reduc6 Test Suite runi m#tmmm#W ##*t»H####)J!H^ Inv
g J Task219Base Test Suite run 1 wrnttmtt##ttmt> ffftffSWSWWSSW* Inv
g J Task219Reduc€ Test Suite run 1 #*WWSWftffWWff ttmtimwtttttmm Inv
g KJ Test2D9 3
g KJ TestMTBE
g J examplecity 2
g J lake IN 2008 i
g J Rates Where):
g J TestRatesAII
g KJ Task214BRPMR

9 > M h & il: '.:•: Search < L Mil 1

Tets MTBE mmmmtm&mtt ttwwnnnntmntm inv

NEI Benchmark mmmwmm mmvmmmm inv

Hum Lock ,(S 4; ;& •-,


i
Page B-10
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
       You can view data specific to a particular state by clicking on the StateName in the table.
    G Microsoft Access
    i Hie  Edit Maw Insert Format Records  Tools Windom Help
      -!d °!i .j J. y A ^  i,    - \ ii il f; -
                                                                           Type a question fen help  »

• • state : Table
J

r
F







—





—





—

—


1
FlPSStateld
StateName
Q ALABAMA
2 ALASKA
4 ARIZONA
5: ARKANSAS
E
8
CALIFORNIA
COLORADO
9' CONNECTICUT
10: DELAWARE
11
12
13
15
1E
17
18
StateAbbr | NLEVFileNarne
AL
AK
AZ
AR
CA
CO
CT
DE
DISTRICT OF C DC
FLORIDA
GEORGIA
HAWAII
IDAHO
ILLINOIS
INDIANA
IOWA
20 KANSAS
21
KENTUCKY
22 LOUISIANA
23 MAINE
24
25
MARYLAND
FL
GA
HI
ID
IL
IN
IA
KS
KY
LA
ME
MD
MASSACHUSE MA
26 MICHIGAN
27 MINNESOTA
28 MISSISSIPPI
291 MISSOURI
30 MONTANA
Ml
MN
MS
MO
MT




EPACA nlv

EPACTPAR.nlv
10000. nlv
11000. nlv










EPAME.nlv
24000. NLV
EPAMA.nlv





T2ExhPhaselriF|T2E\l
How to create a DSN Connection to a MySQL database

       If you do not find the MySQL database referenced in the Data Source Name listing in
MS Access, a DSN connection must be established. In order to do so, click on the Machine
Data Source tab from the Select Data Source screen. Click the New button, and click Next.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
     PageB-11

-------
March 2012
            MOVES2010b User Guide
              Create New Data Source
                                         Select a type of data source:
                                            System Data Source (Applies to this machine only)
                                           Selecting User Data Source creates a data source
                                           which is specific to this machine, and visible only to
                                           you.
                                                                  Next>    j     Cancel
        At the Create New Data Source Dialog box, select MySQL ODBC 3.51 Driver.  Click
Next
              Create New Data Source
                                         S_elect a driver for which you want to set up a data source.
                                          Name
                                          Microsoft Paradox Driver [x.db )
                                          Microsoft Paradox-Treiber (K.db)
                                          Microsoft Text Driver f.txt; K.csv)
                                          Microsoft Text-Treiber (*.txt; *.csv)
                                          Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver
                                          Microsoft Visual FoxPro-Treiber
                                          MvSQL. ODBC 3.51 Driver
                                          SQL Server
                                          SQL Server Native Client 10.0
                                          <
                                                     < Back
   Next>
                   >
Cancel
        Click Finish to establish the connection.
Page B-12
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                     March 2012
            Create New Data Source
                                   When you click Finish, you will create the data source
                                   which you have just configured. The driver may prompt you
                                   for more information.
                                   User Data Source
                                   Driver: MySQL ODBC 3.51 Driver
                                              < Back
Finish
Cancel
       The Connector/ODBC screen is used to establish the connection from MS Access to the
MySQL database.  Use this screen to define the Data Source Name. Enter "localhost" for
Server and "ODBC" as User, but leave the Password field blank.

7 Note  Consider making the Data Source Name similar to the database name, such as
         DSN DatabaseName.  This will make it easier to find.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                          Page B-13

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
H Connector/ODBC 3.51.14 - Add Data Source Name f?]fxl
Connector/ODBC VV
MySQL;
Login Connect Options I Advanced I
Data Source Name |movesdb2Q1 10808
Description
Server |localhost
User ODBC
Password
Database |movesdb20110808 ^J

Test Diagnostics » Ok

Server
The hostname of the MySQL
server.
Optional Yes (silently
uses default)
Default localhost
Cancel Help
      Once the Data Source Name has been created, click Test.  The pop-up box
Connector/ODBC should open, with the message, "Success; connection was made!" Press OK,
and the pop-up box will disappear.  Click OK to create the DSN connection.
                              Connector/ODBC
                                   Success; connection was made!
                                         OK
      The Data Source Name will now be listed in the Select Data Source window.

Using Microsoft Excel with MySQL Tables

 7 Note    MySQL Query Browser can also be used to export MySQL database tables to Excel.

   1  Follow the instructions in the Adding a MySQL database as an ODBC User Data
      Source in Appendix B-2 for adding the desired MySQL database as an ODBC data
      source.
Page B-14
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
   2.  Open an Excel file. Click on Data from the top menu bar, and choose From Other
       Sources, then chose ODBC DSN from the dialog window shown below.
Data Connection Wizard f?]®
Welcome to the Data Connection Wizard ^Bl
This wizard will help you connect to a remote data source.
What kind of data source do you want to connect to?
Microsoft SQL Server
Microsoft SQL Server Analysis Services
Microsoft Data Access - OLE DB Provider for Oracle
Other/Advanced


Cancel Next >

       2.  From the Connect to ODBC Data Source window, select the desired DSN from the
          list (e.g., "MOVESDB20110808"). Click Next.
Data Connection Wizard P?]®
Connect to ODBC Data Source
Choose the ODBC data source you want to connect to.
ODBC data sources:
dBASE Files
Excel Files
•movesdb201 10808 •
movestestresults
MS Access Database

•



Cancel < Back Next >

   4.  Continue by selecting the specific table to display after checking the Connect to a
       specific table: checkbox
United States Environmental Protection Agency
     Page B-15

-------
March 2012
             MOVES2010b User Guide
T
DataConnectionWizard [ ? ]'X
Select Database and Table l^SPi
Select the Database and Table/Cube which contains the data you want, BffnSl
Select the database that contains the data you want;
movesdb20110808
0 Connect to a specific table:
v

Name Description Modified Created Type
IHp MySQL table TABLE
d agegroup MySQL table TABLE
Cl atbaseemissions MySQL table TABLE
U atratio MySQL table TABLE
U atratiogasZ MySQL table TABLE
LH atrationongas MySQL table TABLE
LH averagetankgasoline MySQL table TABLE
LH averagetanktemperature MySQL table TABLE

Cancel




f < Back |[ Next >
Finish

    5.   Continue by accepting the Connection File Name and optionally entering a Description,
         then clicking the Finish button.
                      Data Connection Wizard
                      Save Data Connection File and Finish

                        Enter a name and description for your new Data Connection f\\et and press Finish to
                        save.

                      File Name:
                      movesdbZOl 10803 agecategory.odc
                                                                                 Browse.,
                                               fJII Save password in file
                      Description:
                      Age Category]
                      Friendly Name:
                      movesdbZOl 10808 agecategory
                      Search Keywords:
                      C] Always attempt to use this file to refresh data

                      Excel Services:
                                  Authentication Settings.,.
                                                   Cancel
                                                              < Back
                                                                        Next >
                                                                                    Finish
Page B-16
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                                March 2012
    6.  The data from the selected table will be displayed in Excel.
                                       Home

                              Table Name:
                               Table_movesdb2
                               •ri> Resize Table
                                 Properties
 Insert     Page Layout

J5J Summarize with PivotTable
|»p3 Remove Duplicates
Jjj| Convert to Range
          Tools
                                                                                  Bookl
                                                                       Formulas     Data
Export Refresh

       Extern a
                                       Al

                                                                                    D
                                  agelD Q ageGroupID Q ageCategoryName
                                         0
                                         1
                                         2
                                         3
                                         4
                                         5
                                         6
          3 new
          3 one year old
          3 two years old
          3 three years old
        405 four years old
        405 five years old
        607 six years old
        607 seven years old
        S09 eight years old
        809 nine years old
    7.  To reopen the table next time, there is no need to re-invoke the Data Connection Wizard.
        Instead, simply click on Existing Connections to re-select the table data.
                              Existing Connections
                              Show:  AH Connections
                              Selects Connection:
                              Connections in this Workbook
                                   
                              Connection files on the Network
                                   < [Jo connections found>
                              Connection file
                                   movesdb2011Q80B agecategory
                                   Age Category
                                   MSN HoneyCentral Investor Currency Rates
                                   [Blank]
                                   MSN ! luiieyCentral Investor Major Iiidicies
                                   plank]
                                   MSN MoReyCentral Investor Stock Quotes
                                   [Blank]
                               Browse for More..
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                                      Page B-17

-------
March 2012
                                                                MOVES2010b User Guide
Appendix B2 - Guide To Linking To MySQL from MS Office 2003

This appendix describes in detail how to transform MOVES MySQL tables into Microsoft
ACCESS database tables or Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. This may be useful for those who
wish to view or manipulate these tables in an alternate format.  This appendix also explains how
to use the Open Database Connectivity interface protocols and tools.

Adding a MySQL database as an ODBC User Data Source

    1.  Install MySQL driver, MyODBC-3.51.06.exe. This is part of the normal MOVES
       installation process and can be done by executing the MOVES2010a Installation Suite
     * MOVES Installation Suite
                                                                                        -lD|x|
                      MOVES2010b Installation Suite (for 32/64-bit Windows)
        System
       information
             InstallJava
                1.7.0
  Remove
Other MySQL
Setup MySQL
   5.5.12
                                                      Application
                                                                 Install Query
Install MySQL
  ODBC 5.1
Help / Contact
    Info
         Windows System Information
          Windows version:
          Windows directory:
          System directory:
          CPU:
          Physical Memory (MB):
                           Windows XP 32 Bit, version: 5.1 .2
                           C:\WINDOWS
                           C:\WINDOWS\system32
                           Type:  586       Number of processor(s):  8
                           Total:  3326      Available:   2376
         MOVES System Information
          Components      Status   Install Locations
                                                                    Printable View    Refresh
    Java 1.7.0:
    MySQL 5.5.12:
    MySQL Data:
    MOVES2010bApp.
    MOVES Database:
    Query1 Browser:
    Workbench 5.2
                          Installed |co,Program FilesUavaljdkl .7.0
                          Installed |c:\Program Files\MySQUMySQL Server 5.5
                          Installed |c:WlySQUdataWala
                          Unknown unknown
                          Unknown unknown
                          Installed |c:\Program FileslMySQQMySQL Tools for 5.0
                          Installed [^Program Files'iMySQQMySQL Workbench 5.2 CE
This Suite invokes DOS screens to perform necessary tasks during installation; please disregard all popup DOS screens.
                                                                                         Exit Suite
Page B-18
                                                     United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                                        March 2012
    2.  Create an ODBC data source with the same name as the folder which corresponds to the
        MySQL database.

        a.   In the Control Panel, select Administrative Tools.
              File  Edit   View   Favorites   Tools   Help

                                     H Search  1^3 Folders
              Address
                       | Control Panel
                                                                                          Links
              Name
                                      \ Comment
             	J Accessibility Options
             c3g Add/Remove Hardware
               1 Add/Remove Programs
                Administrative Tools
               't Automatic Updates
               |BDE Administrator
                I Date/Time
               I Display
               | Find Fast
               f Folder Options
             I^Tl Fonts
             -55, Gaming Options
              ^Internet Options
Customizes accessibility features for your computer
Installs, removes, and troubleshoots hardware
Installs and removes programs and Windows components
Configures administrative settings for your computer
Configures Automatic Updates
Configures the Borland Database Engine
Sets the date, time, and time zone for your computer
Customizes your desktop display and screen saver
Microsoft Find Fast (tm) content indexer
Customizes the display of files and folders, changes file a...
Displays and manages fonts on your computer
Adds, removes, or changes settings for game controllers
Configure your Internet display and connection settings.
             Configures administrative settings for your computer
        b   In the Administrative Tools menu, select Data Sources (ODBC)
Pa Administrative Tools i
File Edit View Favorites Tools Help
^•Back ~ -*• - S3
'^Search ^Folders iJJJ
13 QJ X t^a
Address [ilBl Administrative Tools
Name
3fcb Component Services
1 Size
1 KB
Jei Computer Management 2 KB

tjlJ Event Viewer
s$ Local Security Policy
'$fjf Performance
^^ Services
| 2 KB
2KB
2 KB
2 KB
2 KB
i^BLJ Telnet Server Administration 2 KB


Type 1
Shortcut
Shortcut
Shortcut
Shortcut
Shortcut
Shortcut
Shortcut
Shortcut

n
H-
_-J £>Go Links **]
Modified
2/10/2004 11:13 AM
5/23/2003 10:28 AM
11/19/2003 12:55 PM
5/8/2002 9:06 AM
5/8/2002 1:37 PM
6/16/2003 12:48 PM
3/6/2003 10:55 AM
1/20/2004 12:21 PM
1 >l
          Adds, removes, and configures Open Database Connectivit  1.52 KB
                                   IBB My Computer
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                                              Page B-19

-------
March 2012
           MOVES2010b User Guide
        c  In the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog choose to Add a User Data
           Source.
                User DSN j System DSN ]  File DSN ] Drivers ] Tracing j  Connection Pooling ] About

                 User Data Sources:
                  Name
                              1 Driver-
                  rnovesdb       MySQL ODBC 3.51 Driver
                 l.'.f.WJJJjJJJIUmi MySQL ODBC 3.51 Driver
                  rnyodbc3-test   MySQL ODBC 3.51 Driver
             Remove
                                                                        Configure...
                         An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to
                         the indicated data provider. A User data source is only visible to you.
                         and can only be used on the current machine.
                                       OK
                                                  Car-
                                                                             Help
        d.  The "New Data Source"  should use the MySQL ODBC Driver that was installed
           earlier.  Scroll through the list until the MySQL ODBC 3.51 Driver is found, click it,
           and click Finish.
             Create New Data Source
                                      Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source.
Name
Microsoft Paradox Driver (".db )
Microsoft Paradox-Treiber (K.db )
Microsoft Text Driver (".txt; K.csv)
Microsoft Text-Treiber (K.txt; x.csv)
Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver
Microsoft Visual FoxPro-Treiber
IMvSQL ODBC 3.51 Driver 1
Oracle ODBC Driver
SQL Server

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
            March 2012
       e.   Next, the database links need to be defined. The values shown below are for a
           database called "movesdefault". The database name should be the name of the folder
           which contains the desired MySQL database files (i.e., the MySQL database name).
      Connector/ODBC 3.51.25 - Add Data Source Name
                  Connector/ODBC

     Login   Connect Options    Advanced
       Data Source Name I movesdefault
       Description      | Current database
       Server


       User


       Password


       Database
                     movesdeFault
                                             ~
                         Test      Diagnostics »
                                                    Connector/ODBC Configuration
                                                    This dialog is used to add a Data Source Name
                                                    (DSN).
                                                          Qk
Oancel  ] [    Help
       f   Once the database name and the data source name list an existing MySQL database
           name, the database connection can be checked by clicking Test.
                                 Connector/ODBC
                                       Success; connection was made!
                                             OK
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                 PageB-21

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
       g.  The added data source will show up in the list of data sources in the ODBC Data
          Source Administrator dialog. This will finish the process of creating a new ODBC
          data source associated with a particular MySQL database.
f '! ODBC Data Source Administrator
u
ser DSN
User Data
Name
System DSN | File DSN
Sources:
1 Driver
199QNOX_MOVES_Qut MySQLC
dBASE Files Microsof
EmFlatesByAge MySQL C
Excel Files Microsof
MOVESDB2009112 MySQLC
MySQL C
MS Access Database Microsof
Drivers

]DBC3.5
dBase D
3DBC3.5
Excel Dr
]DBC3.5
3DBC3.5
Access
(SB
Tracing Connection Pooling About |
1 Add... |
1 Driver
river f.dbf) Remove
1 Driver
ver (".His) Configure...
1 Driver
driver (".nndb)
>^gf] An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to
f^lj the indicated data provider. A User data source is only visible to you,
^^^ and can only be used on the current machine.



OK



Cancel Help


Page B-22
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
Using Microsoft Access with MySQL Tables

    1.   Run an Access .mdb (either a new one or an existing one).

    2.   On the top menu bar, look for menu items File, Get External Data, then click Link
       Tables ... (see picture below). Click on the item Link Tables...
   3.  On the pop-up window like the one shown below, choose ODBC Databases() from the
       drop-down list which is located next to the label Files of type.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
     Page B-23

-------
March 2012
                                     MOVES2010b User Guide
     4.   Another pop-up window similar to the one below will appear.  Click on the tab Machine
         Data Source, to select a database of interest.
                                         Select the file data source that describes the drr«e- -ha! you i..v!-;h ;o connect to.
                                         You can u;e arij,' tile data source that relers to an ODBC driver which is installed
         In this example NMIM20070812 is chosen from the Data Source Name column.  Select
         OK to load the data into Access.
             : File  Edit

             I J _; d
                       Insert Format  Tools Table Wndow  Help
jj, -> -3 -1 H R>li
                       - Times New Roman  - 12 -  B /
                                          u      « • := - is •= if if g - "
                                                                      'fe -U«»ad g
                                                                                         Type a queL-viori for holp , x
             kl
             7
                                         azmaricopa_mQ
                                         dBASE Files
                                         Excel Files
                                         MOVES DB20Q81202
                                         MS Access Database
                                         A Machine Data Source is specific to this machine, and cannot be shared.
                                         "User" data cource: are vpecilic to a :.r,er on thi; machine "System" data
                                         sourc.es can be u.
-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
       If the Data Source Name of the file is not listed, the user must follow the instructions
       provided in the section, How to create a DSN Connection to a MySQL database,
       presented later in this appendix.

    5.  Once the data is loaded into access, the Link Tables window shown below will appear.
       This screen displays all of the database tables that are visible in Access. Select tables to
       view, and click the OK button.
                               I u     m • ;i- 'IE - » if Q
         Fiie Edit  View  Insert Format  lools  Table Window Help
                           •a y -i -   * J J 3 u
Tables


cntycntsncd!999
cntycntsncdSGQZ
coryel 05 temp
coryel_0&_sum
coryel 09 temp
coryell nat vmt
county
county map
county month
County monthhour
county monthhour 2002



i OK 1
1 '
\ Cancel ]
[ Select All ]

Deselect All ]



1 1 Save password

             | AutoShapes- \ \ D O v|
United States Environmental Protection Agency
     Page B-25

-------
March 2012
           MOVES2010b User Guide
       In the following screen shot, the user has chosen three tables to work with in MS Access:
baseyearvmt, county, and state.  The user can now work with these tables in MS Access.
XCaution!   Edits made to the tables or data in MS Access will not affect the original MySQL
               tables and cannot be used directly in MOVES.
       D Microsoft Access
        File Edit View Insert lools Window Help
       i J  J

                                       Create table in Design view
                                       Create table by using wizard
                                       Create table by entering data
                                       baseyearvmt
                                       county
Page B-26
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
       You can view data specific to a particular state by clicking on the StateName in the table.
              : File Edit View Insert Format
                                tools Window Help
                                  21 :U /
                        Q ALABAMA
                        2 ALASKA
                        4 ARIZONA
                        2 FLORIDA
                        3 GEORGIA
                        5 HAWAII
                        6 IDAHO _
                        7 ILLINOIS
                        8 INDIANA
                        9 IOWA
                        20 KANSAS
                        21 KENTUCKY
                        22 LOUISIANA
                        23 MAINE
                        24 MARYU
                        25 MASSACH
                        26 MICHIGAN
                        27 MINNESOT;
                        28 MISSfSSIPf
                        20: MISSOURI
                        30 MONTA
\IA AZ
JSAS :AR
URNIA
?ADO
ECTICUT
VARE
CTOFC
DA
3IA
I

S
A

\S
CKY
ANA
-AND
fl,CHUSE
SAN
SOTA
SIPPI
URI
\NA
CA
CO
CT
DE
DC
FL
GA
HI
ID
IL
IN
IA
KS
KY
LA
ME
MD
MA
Ml
MN
MS
MO
MT

EPACA.nl*
EPACTPAR.nlv
lOQOQ.nlv
11000,nlv










EPAME nlv
2400Q.NLV
EPAMAnlv







EPACA ..EPACA.
EPA2008 EPA2008






EPACA
EPACA








EPACA
EPACA







EPACA

EPA2008







EPACA
EPACA










1
1






9





How to create a DSN Connection to a MySQL database

       If you do not find the MySQL database referenced in the Data Source Name listing in
MS Access, a DSN connection must be established.  In order to do so, click on the Machine
Data Source tab from the Select Data Source screen. Click New, and click Next.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
     Page B-27

-------
March 2012
           MOVES2010b User Guide
        At the Create New Data Source Dialog box, select MySQL ODBC 3.51 Driver  Click
Next
        Click Finish to begin to establish the connection.
                                                                            i vpe a quecfciciri for heto
                                                 L lor-Iranle
                                            Microsoft Paradox D rivet (".db
                                            Microsoft Paradox-Treiber (".db ]
                                            Microsoft Texf Driver [".Ixt; *.csv]
                                            Microsoft Texi-Treiber (".M; *.c$v]
                                            Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver
                                            '•-ien ecu did fir :hi uc'U will create the data
                                               ij have iusl configured. The driver may prompt yc
        The Connector/ODBC screen is used to establish the connection from MS Access to the
MySQL database. Use this screen to define the Data Source Name.
Page B-28
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
  Note  Consider making the Data Source Name similar to the database name, such as
        DSN DatabaseName.  This will make it easier to find.
       Once the Data Source Name has been created, select the Test button.  The pop-up box
Connector/ODBC should open, with the message, "Success; connection was made!" Press OK,
and the pop-up box will disappear. Click OK to create the DSN connection.
       The Data Source Name will now be listed in the Select Data Source window.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
     Page B-29

-------
March 2012
                                                MOVES2010b User Guide
Using Microsoft Excel with MySQL Tables

 ^ Note    MySQL Query Browser can also be used to export MySQL database tables to Excel.

    1.  Follow the instructions in the section, Adding a MySQL Database as an ODBC User
       Data Source, for adding the desired MySQL database as an ODBC data source.

    2.  Open an Excel file. Click on Data from the top menu bar, and choose Import External
       Data.  Select New Database Query from the sub-menu window. This will open the
       Choose Data Source window.

    3.  From the Choose Data Source window, select the desired DSN from the list (e.g.,
       "MOVESDB"), then click OK.
             Choose Data Source
Databases  Queries
MOVESDB2004"
MOVES Default"
MQIS (not sharable)
MQIS"
MS SQL ServerG-Approach (not sharable)
MS Sybase SQL Server-Approach (not sharable)
MSODJW
M I J I L J >-| I imi IT:-:
                                                          J
                                                                   QIC
                                                                  Cancel
                                                        J
                                                                 Browse...
                                                                 Options...
                        Use the Query Wizard to create/edit queries
   4.  Click the OK button in the mysql Driver connect window.

Enter a database
nes with NO WARRANTY of any kind
and options for connect

M.vSQL host (name or IP): |
MySQL database name: JMOVESDB
User: |
Password: |
Port ft not 3306): j
SQL command on connect: 1
F Don't optimise column width
F Return matching rows
F Trace MyQDBC
F Allow BIG results
F Don't prompt on connect
F Simulate ODBC 1.0
F Ignores in tt.table
F Use manager cursors (exp)
F Don't use setlocale





F Pad CHAR to full length
F Return table names in SQLDescribeCol
F Use compressed protocol
F Ignore space after function names
F Force use of named pipes
F Change BIGINT columns to INT
F No catalog (exp)
F Read options from DVnji.cnl
F Safety (Check this if you have problems)
F Disable tiansactions
Lo^J ^^
   5.  Follow the instructions posted by the Wizard until finished.
Page B-30
                                      United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

Appendix C - Running MOVES from the Command Line

       The MOVES command line allows MOVES2010b to be executed without running its
graphical user interface. It is useful in situations where repeated or unattended runs are needed,
or when another computer program executes MOVES. This interface presumes that a MOVES
run specification file has been prepared and that you are running from the DOS prompt.

       These instructions presume some familiarity with DOS commands. The DOS commands
to execute the MOVES Command Line Interface are:

Java gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine -r runspecfile
[OR]
Java -XmxNNNm gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine -r runspecfile
[OR]
Java gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine -rl runspeclistfile
[OR]
Java XmxNNNm gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine -rl runspeclistfile

where

       -XmxNNNm is an optional parameter and NNN is a three digit integer number. For
example, -Xmx200m specifies you are asking Java to allocate 200 megabytes of heap memory
for your runs. This optional parameter is required only if your MOVES runs need more heap
memory than the default determined automatically by Java and your machine. The actual
maximum amount of heap memory that you can ask for depends on your machine. You can
increase or decrease the amount of heap memory as your machine allows. For example,

Java -Xmx512m gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine -rl runspeclistfile
[OR]
Java -Xmx512m gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine -r runspecfile

       "runspecfile" is the name of a file containing a saved MOVES run specification (e.g.
"C:\YourPATHto\YourRunSpecName.mrs") and "runspeclistfile" is the name of a text file
containing a list of run specification file names, with one per line.  The rest of the syntax is
literal.  The spelling of "MOVESCommandLine" is case sensitive because it is a Java class
name. When doing a batch run, you can identify the RunSpec list text file in the command line
using quotes because it is located in a folder with spaces (e.g. "C:\My Documents"). However,
the command line doesn't work if you put quotes in the RunSpec list file itself. The command
line will think the file doesn't exist.

       By executing one of these commands, you run the Java interpreter (java.exe).
MOVESCommandLine is a DOS parameter tellingjava.exe which Java class file to begin
executing, and the last two tokens are parameters passed to MOVESCommandLine. Either
version of this command can be executed from a DOS batch file, and batch files  can contain
multiple commands. Prior to executing the command, the active directory should be set to the
location where MOVES is installed, typically C:\Program FilesMVIOVES, and the SETENV.BAT
file should be executed.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                             Page C-l

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

      It can be difficult for DOS to find everything. For the command to work, three elements
must be  found:

   •  The Java interpreter.
   •  The MOVESCommandLine Java class.
   •  Any runspeclistfile and all runspecfiles.

      Running SETENV.BAT insures that the Java interpreter is found. Running
SETENV.BAT also insures that the procedure described in the next paragraph results in the
MOVESCommandLine Java class being found. Java experts can also use the CLASSPATH
environment variable more directly to locate Java class files.

      If MOVES has been installed in the default location, C:\Program
FilesMVIOVESyyyymmdd, then MOVESCommandLine.class is located at C:\Program
Files\MOVESyyyymmdd\gov\epa\otaq\moves\master\commandline.  This can be made the
active directory, or the command can specify whatever part of the path is needed. For example,
if the active directory is C:\Program FilesMVIOVESyyyymmdd, the command line interface class
would be specified as "gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine".

      One way to insure that the runspecfile or the runspeclistfile is found is to specify the full
path.  If a simple file name is used the file should be located in the active DOS directory.

       If the GUI is used to  create an importer XML file  (see Tools - Section 2.3.3.3), the XML
file can be edited and executed via the command line.  Remember that when using the command
line, text output is  not sent to the screen but instead stored in MOVESBatch.log. An example
command line is:

      Java gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MOVESCommandLine
 -i importAHFromTemplates.xml

      Be sure to place all of this on one line.  The "-i" option directs MOVES to the XML file
that describes the import actions to occur. Note that this XML file contains a summary of the
RunSpec within it, thus allowing wildcards even when importing via the command line.  For
MOVES installations on Windows 2000 platforms, there may be a problem with the DOS
command string length not allowing more than 126 characters. To resolve this, move MOVES to
the root  of C: drive (C:\MO VES\),  so that the length of the command line string will be shorter.
Note that Windows2000 is not a recommended or supported environment in which to run
MOVES.

       If the GUI is used to  create an importer XML file  (see Tools - Section 2.3.3.3), the XML
file can be edited and executed via the command line.  Remember that when using the command
line, text output is  not sent to the screen but instead stored in MOVESBatch.log.
Appendix D - Creating an On-Road Retrofit Input File
Page C-2                                            United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
       The On-Road Retrofit strategy allows you to enter information about diesel trucks and
buses that have been retrofitted with emission control equipment. An On-Road Retrofit
Parameters File must be input to the MOVES model to model on-road vehicle retrofit effects.
This file can be in tab-delimited text, comma-delimited (*.csv), or Microsoft Excel (*.XLS)
format. Create the Retrofit Parameters File by using either a text editor such as Wordpad or
Notepad, or a spreadsheet such as Excel.

Header and Comment Rows

       The first row of the Retrofit Parameter File must be a header row that contains the retrofit
input parameter names separated by tabs. The remaining rows of the file contain the retrofit
parameters.  Comment rows are allowed if the first character in the row or the first cell in the
tabbed file or *.XLS file is the '#' character.

Retrofit Parameter File Format

       The Retrofit Parameter File must contain the following ten parameters in the order listed.
Each parameter's possible values are provided.

       1.  Retrofit Pollutant

       This column must contain the full MOVES pollutant name or the pollutant abbreviation
for which you wish to model retrofit data.  (In MOVES the user may not use the MOVES
PollutantID number.) The data must appear exactly as shown in Table D-l below, except that the
pollutant abbreviation and/or full name input are not case sensitive.

                                       Table D-l
                           Retrofit Parameter File Pollutants
PollutantID
1
2
3
5
6
90
91
92
93
Full MOVES Pollutant Name
Total Gaseous Hydrocarbons
Carbon Monoxide (CO)
Oxides of Nitrogen
Methane (CH4)
Nitrous Oxide (N2O)
Atmospheric CO2
Total Energy Consumption
Petroleum Energy Consumption
Fossil Fuel Energy Consumption
Pollutant Abbreviation
HC
CO
NOX
CH4
N2O
ATCO2
TotEnergy
PetEnergy
FossilEnergy
                                                                              (cont.)
Page D-2
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
                                      Table D-l
                        Retrofit Parameter File Pollutants (cont.)
PollutantID
98
101
102
105
106
107
111
112
115
116
117
Full MOVES Pollutant Name
CO2 Equivalent
Primary PM10 - Organic Carbon
Primary PM10 - Elemental Carbon
Primary PM10 - Sulfate Paniculate
Primary PM10 - Brakewear Particulate
Primary PM10 - Tirewear Particulate
Primary PM2.5 - Organic Carbon
Primary PM2.5 - Elemental Carbon
Primary PM2.5 - Sulfate Particulate
Primary PM2.5 - Brakewear Particulate
Primary PM2.5 - Tirewear Particulate
Pollutant Abbreviation
CO2EQ
PM10OC
PM10EC
PMlOSulfate
PMlOBrake
PMlOTire
PM25OC
PM25EC
PM25 Sulfate
PM25Brake
PM25Tire
       2.  Retrofit Emission Process Input

       This column must contain the full MOVES process name or the ProcessID abbreviation
for which you wish to model retrofit data.  In MOVES, do not use MOVES ProcessID.  The data
must appear exactly as shown in Table D-2 below, except that the ProcessID abbreviation and
full name are not case sensitive.
                                      Table D-2
                           Retrofit Parameter File Processes
ProcessID
1
2
90
9
10
Full MOVES Process Name
Running Exhaust
Start Exhaust
Extended Idle Exhaust
Brakewear
Tirewear
Process Abbreviation
Running
Start
Extended Idle
Brake
Tire
United States Environmental Protection Agency
      Page D-3

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
       3.  Retrofit Fuel Type Input

       This column must contain the full MOVES fuel name or the fuel abbreviation for which
you wish to model retrofit data.  In MOVES, do not use FuelTypelD.  The data must appear
exactly as shown in Table D-3 below, except that the fuel abbreviation and full name are not case
sensitive.
                                      Table D-3
                          Retrofit Parameter File Fuel Types
FuelTypelD
1
2
5
Full MOVES Fuel Type
Name
Gasoline
Diesel Fuel
Ethanol (E85)
Fuel Type Abbreviation
Gas
Diesel
Ethanol
       4.  Retrofit Vehicle Source Type Input

       This column must contain the Sourcetype abbreviation or the full MOVES Sourcetype
name for which you wish to model retrofit data. In MOVES, do not use SourceTypelD number.
The data must appear exactly as shown in Table D-4 below, except that the sourcetype
abbreviation and full name input are not case sensitive.

       In MOVES2010b, diesel (FuelTypelD = 2) vehicles with the following SourceTypelDs
are covered by the Retrofit Calculations:  32, 41, 42, 43, 51, 52, 53, 61, and 62.
Page D-4
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
                                       Table D-4
                          Retrofit Parameter File Source Types
SourceTypelD
11
21
31
32
51
52
53
54
43
42
41
61
62
Full MOVES Vehicle
SourceType Name
Motorcycle*
Passenger Car*
Passenger Truck*
Light Commercial Truck
Refuse Truck
Single Unit Short-Haul Truck
Single Unit Long-Haul Truck
Motor Home
School Bus
Transit Bus
Intercity Bus
Combination Short-haul Truck
Combination Long-haul Truck
SourceType Abbreviation
MC
Car
PTruck
ComTruck
RefuseTruck
SUShortTruck
SULongTruck
MH
SBus
TBus
IBus
CShortTruck
CLongTruck
       * These sourcetypes should not be used in retrofit input files.

       MOVES compares inputs for pollutant, process, fuel type, and source type with the stored
retrofit possibilities and prompts you if an incorrect name, abbreviation or number for pollutant,
process, fuel type, or source type is entered.

       5. Initial Calendar Year of Retrofit Implementation

       The Initial Calendar Year of the Retrofit Implementation is the first calendar year that a
retrofit program is administered. Initial Calendar Year input must be equal to or less than the
Final Calendar Year of Retrofit Implementation.  All months within a calendar year are affected
equally by the retrofit.

       6. Final Calendar Year of Retrofit Implementation

       The Final Calendar Year of the Retrofit Implementation is the last calendar year that a
retrofit program is administered. Final Calendar Year input must be equal to or greater than the
Initial Calendar Year of Retrofit Implementation.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
      Page D-5

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

       7. Initial Model Year that will be Retrofitted

       The Initial Model Year that will be Retrofit is the first model year of coverage for a
particular vehicle class/pollutant combination. Valid entries for initial model year must meet the
following mathematical requirement:

       Initial Model Year > Initial Calendar Year - 30

       The Initial Model Year cannot be greater than the Final Model Year that will be Retrofit.

       8. Final Model Year that will be Retrofitted

       The Final Model Year that will be retrofitted is the last model year of coverage  for a
particular vehicle class/pollutant combination. No retrofit will  be performed on Final Model
Year input which is larger than the Evaluation Calendar Year.  Also, the Final Model Year input
cannot be less than the Initial Model Year that will be retrofitted.

       9. Percentage of the Fleet Retrofit per Year

       The Percentage of the Fleet Retrofit per Year represents the percentage of VMT of a
particular fleet of a particular vehicle class, retrofit calendar year group, model year group, and
pollutant combination that is to be rebuilt in a given calendar year.  For  a successful retrofit
simulation, a value greater than zero and less than or equal to 100.0% must be entered.  MOVES
checks to ensure that the product of the number of calendar years of retrofit coverage (Final
Calendar Year of Retrofit Implementation - Initial Calendar Year of Retrofit Implementation)
and the Percentage of the Fleet Retrofit per Year does not exceed 100%. For example,  a retrofit
simulation will be flagged as invalid, and an error message will appear,  if the simulation has a
retrofit program start in calendar year 2005, a program end in calendar year 2008, and a yearly
Fleet Retrofit Percentage of 50% (3 * 50% > 100%).

       10. Percentage Effectiveness of the Retrofit

The Percentage Effectiveness of the Retrofit is the percent emission reduction achieved by a
retrofit. It is computed from a non-retrofit emission baseline.  You must enter a retrofit
effectiveness value for a particular vehicle class, retrofit calendar year group, model year group,
and pollutant combination. All values  up to 100% are valid. A negative value is permitted
because it implies an emission increase as a result of retrofit, which can occur.  A value greater
than 100% is not permitted because it implies negative emissions will be generated. See also
EPA's guidance on quantifying benefits from retrofits at
http://www.epa.gov/otaq/stateresources/transconf/policy.htm.
Page D-6                                               United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                              March 2012
Appendix E - Best Practices

       There are several best practices that can assist in managing various aspects of the
MOVES process. In particular, we have found it helpful to be careful and consistent in naming,
managing & documenting RunSpecs and files.

 ^ NOTE     MOVES database names must be consistent with MySQL naming conventions.
             In general, this means they may contain letters, numbers, "_"(underscore) and "$"
             characters. They may not contain spaces, special characters, or be "reserved
             words" (SQL words such as "select", "where", "delete", etc.).

                                      Table E-l
                                MOVES Best Practices
  Suggestion
Rationale
Example
  Name all your MOVES
  output databases with a code
  indicating that the database
  includes MOVES output.
Prevents overwriting
input files; makes it
easier to identify output
files.
Washtenaw2008_MO (for
MOVES Output) or
Washtenaw2008  out
  When testing MOVES,
  name output with "Temp" or
  other indicator.
Mysql/data folder can get
cluttered. This allows
you to clean up more
easily.
Washtenaw2008_temp_MO
  Name all your MOVES
  input databases and strategy
  files with a code indicating
  that the database contains
  MOVES alternate input data.
Helps you organize your
inputs and prevents you
from inadvertently
damaging important input
information.
Washtenaw2008  IN
  Name all your MOVES
  RunSpec files with a code
  indicating that the file
  contains a MOVES
  RunSpec.
Helps you organize your
input information and can
be used to locate files
using a search.
Washtenaw2008.mrs (for
MOVES Run Specification) or
Washtenaw2008  mrs.txt
  Name all the files you use
  for a specific run using the
  same name, but with
  extensions to identify the
  parts (see file naming
  suggestions above).
Helps you organize your
information.
Washtenaw2008_in,
Washtenaw2008.mrs,
Washtenaw2008  mo
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                                   Page E-l

-------
March 2012
                                 MOVES2010b User Guide
  Suggestion
Rationale
Example
  Keep all of yourRunSpecs
  in the same directory as the
  import files associated with
  that RunSpec.  This folder
  should be outside the folders
  installed by MOVES so that
  it will not be overwritten
  when installing a new
  version of MOVES.
MOVES will first look in
the location of the
RunSpec when browsing
for import files, so
keeping them all in one
place keeps you from
searching for the files that
will be imported.
My Documents\MOVES\
[CountyYear]
  Decide on the Scale and
  Calculation Type you wish
  to use before making
  selections on any other
  panels.
Changing the Scale or
Calculation Type option
after making choices in
other panels may require
you to re-enter data for
those panels.
  Using the description panel
  is helpful when trying to
  discriminate between several
  runs.  Think about filling out
  some sort of repeatable
  formula such as date,
  relevant important
  parameters, who is doing the
  run, etc.
  Note that MOVES preserves
  these descriptions in the
  movesrun output table for
  future reference.
Documentation of the
RunSpec is very
important, especially if
many scenarios are being
processed.
 2010_01_01; John Doe;
Washtenaw County; 2010; July
  Every run used for any
  official purpose should be
  archived completely. All
  batch files, RunSpecs,
  MOVES code and
  configuration files,
  supplemental code copied
  into MOVES by batch files,
  default database, user input
  databases, etc. should be
  saved.  File location can be
  added as the "Description"
  when the file is imported.
Months or years later, the
run can be reproduced by
anyone opening the
archive.
Page E-2
                       United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                             March 2012
  Suggestion
Rationale
Example
  If they are not too large,
  output related runs should be
  saved to the same MySQL
  database.
Combined with useful
RunSpec descriptions,
you can keep all the data,
and its description in a
single place. Looking at
the Moves Run table in
that database can be very
informative.
  Always "GROUP BY"
  MOVESRunID, PollutantID,
  and DaylD when summing
  output results.
If a table includes output
from multiple runs, it is
very easy to mistakenly
sum them together,
thereby drastically
increasing emissions.
Emissions from different
pollutants should never
be summed.  The types of
day must be correctly
weighted before they can
be summed.
SELECT MOVESRunID, DaylD,
PollutantID, sum(emissionquant)
FROM MOVESOutput
GROUP BY MOVESRunID,
DaylD, PollutantID;
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                                   Page E-3

-------

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

Appendix F - Stage II Refueling Control Programs

       Stage II refueling emission control programs are intended to reduce HC and associated
air toxics emissions by reducing the amount of gasoline vapor that escapes to the atmosphere
during refueling. The Refueling Displacement Vapor Losses and the Refueling Spillage Losses
processes are affected by Stage II.  Stage II controls reduce the amount of fuel spilled due to
"spitback".  No other emission processes should be affected by Stage II control programs. The
amount of reduction depends on whether the vehicle has an onboard recovery system and the
level of uncontrolled emissions. The uncontrolled emissions are calculated from inputs such as
fuel RVP, vehicle fuel economy, and temperature parameters. Stage II programs are run by
state, local or tribal governments and the effects of these programs will vary depending on the
number of locations and the sales volume of stations equipped with Stage II recovery systems
and their average state of repair.

       The MOVES database contains information about all of the existing Stage II programs by
county based on the parameters used for the 2005 National Emission Inventory (NEI). For the
initial release of MOVES, the effects of Stage II programs can only be altered by manually
editing the tables used by MOVES to obtain the Stage II control information. Future versions of
MOVES are expected to include graphical user interface (GUI) tools to assist in altering Stage II
program effects for individual counties.  Until these tools are available, this appendix is intended
to assist in making changes to the default parameters related to the effect of Stage II programs on
refueling emissions.

       Stage II refueling emission control programs can only affect refueling losses that occur
during refueling. Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)  systems on modern vehicles are
designed to minimize the refueling losses without Stage II controls.  These reductions are already
accounted for by MOVES, so that the additional control of Stage II will only affect the
remaining refueling losses from these ORVR vehicles.

       Only the most recent 31 model years of vehicles in the evaluation calendar year are
simulated when MOVES is run. When the fleet is entirely composed of vehicles subject to
ORVR rules, the only value of Stage II controls will be to control refueling vapors from vehicles
with damaged ORVR systems.  Until that time, having a Stage II control program always adds to
the control of refueling losses, since there are always some vehicles without ORVR controls that
will benefit from a Stage II program. The remaining Stage II benefits depend on the program
design, including the scope (which stations have the program) and effectiveness (how much of
the equipment is operational). MOVES does not account for any effects on the emissions from
refueling station gasoline storage tanks when Stage II is used in  combination with vehicles
equipped with ORVR systems.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                              Page F-l

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

County Year Table

       The MOVES database contains a table named County Year which contains information
about each county for every calendar year.  This table contains two fields that determine the
Stage II program effects:

             o   refueling VaporProgram Adjustment
             o   refuelingSpillProgramAdjustment

       The refuelingVaporProgramAdjustment field is a number between zero and one (1.0)
which indicates the fraction that is the reduction in full uncontrolled refueling displacement
vapor losses that result from the Stage II recovery program that county in that calendar year. The
refuelingSpillProgramAdjustment field is a number between zero and one (1.0) which indicates
the fraction that is the reduction in full uncontrolled refueling fuel spillage losses that result from
the Stage II recovery program that county in that calendar year. A value of zero would indicate
that the program had no effect and a value of one would indicate that all uncontrolled vehicle
refueling emissions had been eliminated.

Updating Refueling Adjustments Using MySQL Query Browser

       The simplest way to change an existing Stage II program effect is to use the MySQL
Query Browser application to open the appropriate table and manually change the existing
values, but NEVER change values in a default MOVES  database provided by EPA.  MOVES is
designed to easily provide replacement values for default values using MySQL tables via the
Manage Input Data Sets panel on the MOVES graphical user interface (GUI).  Using the
Manage Input Data Sets panel, type the name you wish to use for the database which will hold
your Stage II estimates into the Database drop-down box.  Now click the Create Database
button and you will create a database to hold your information.  The name will have to meet the
criteria for database names (no spaces, no special characters) and we suggest it include text to
help you identify its contents and purpose (for example, StageII_Input).

       Once you have an input database, you can open the MySQL Query Browser to work with
the tables. If the Query Browser is already  open, you may need to right-click in the Schemata
panel and refresh the list of database. Once you find your database, double-click on the name
and that will show you all of the tables it contains. The database will contain empty versions of
every table used by MOVES.  The table that contains the Stage II program adjustments is called
County Year and contains only four fields:

                 o  countylD
                 o  yearlD
                 o  refueling VaporProgram Adjustment
                 o  refuelingSpillProgramAdjustment

      Double click on the County Year table and the SQL Query Area panel should show an
SQL command:

     SELECT * FROM MOVESDB201001 IS.countyyear c;

Page F-2                                              United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

You can execute that command by pressing the green "lightning bolt" button or by pressing the
Ctrl-Return keys. This will execute the SQL command and display the contents of the table.
There are thousands of lines for every county and year in the nation. You can edit the SQL
command to select only your location.  For Washtenaw County, Michigan, for the 2010 calendar
year, the appropriate SQL command would be:

    SELECT * FROM MOVESDB20100826.countyyear c where countyID=26161 and
yearend=2010;

All SQL commands must end in a semi-colon.

       If you create an alternate database, as suggested in the Appendix, the County Year table
in that database will be empty. You  can enter values into each field using the Edit button at the
bottom of the panel. Once you click on the Edit button, you can double click on each empty cell
and enter a value. Be sure to execute the Apply Changes button to save any alterations.

      Now return to the Manage Input Data Sets panel and select your database from the drop-
down menu. You can add additional description text and then click the add button. When you
include this database in your run specification,  MOVES will use your values in preference to any
default values in the MOVES database.

      The other empty tables may be  deleted from your database. Leaving them will not harm
your RunSpec (since the tables are empty), but they can be confusing.  To delete empty tables,
go to the Query Browser, double click  on the database to show the tables and right click on the
table you wish to delete.  Choose drop table from the menu and the table will be removed from
that database. Multiple tables can be selected by using the CTRL or Shift buttons.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                              Page F-3

-------

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                         March 2012
Appendix G - MOVES Project Level Example

Definition of the MOVES Project

       In this example RunSpec, MOVES was used to generate emission inventory estimates for
a hypothetical scenario where heavy-duty vehicle traffic is entering and departing a parking lot
using a single roadway. Since this example is only for illustration of the MOVES software
features, it was kept simple intentionally. It does not represent any specific real-world project.

       The Project constraints are:

       1.      There are only two links (inbound and outbound from a parking lot).
       2.      The two links and the off-network link are independent of each other.
       3.     A single off-network link contains all of the parking, extended idle and vehicle
              start operations.
       4.      Only heavy-duty vehicles operate on the roadway and are present in the off-
             network area.
       5.      The project example only models nitrogen oxide (NOx).
       6.      One hour of operation was selected. If the user desired to model additional hours,
             then additional MOVES Projects need to be created.
                        Parking Lot
Roadway Link
             Figure Gl     Basic Schematic of the Project

       Figure Gl shows a basic schematic of the Project to be modeled.  It consists of a parking
lot and a two-way road link leading in and out of the parking lot. The specific modeling
parameters are shown and discussed in Tables Gl, G2 and G3 below.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                              Page G-l

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
Table Gl
Summary of On-road Project Level Parameters
Location County
Calendar Year
Month
Time
Weekday/Weekend
Temperature
Humidity
Road type of links (linkl and link 2)
Roadway Link Length (both links)
Link Traffic Volume - In (link 1)
Link Traffic Volume - Out (link 2)
Link Average Speed - In (link 1)
Link Average Speed - Out (link 2)
Average Road Grad - In (linkl)
Average Road Grad - Out (Iink2)
Number of Vehicle in Parking Lot (link 3)
Washtenaw County, Michigan
2009
January
1 1:00 PM to 1 1:59:59 PM (hour
24)
Weekday
28. 5 F
69.5 %
Rural Unrestricted Access - can represent
any non freeway rural road
0.997 miles
100 vehicles per hour
10 vehicles per hour
28.5 miles per hour
28.5 miles per hour
0.857 percent
-0.857 percent
200 vehicle on average
       Only one county may be chosen for a given project level run. In this example,
Washtenaw County, Michigan was chosen. Any of the 3,222 counties or a custom domain
(defined by the user) may be chosen. Also, only one calendar year, one month and one hour may
be chosen for a given project level run. If you desire to model more than one such entity (i.e., all
24 hours), then you must perform additional and separate project level runs. It is suggested for
such runs that you employ MOVES batch mode features.  A project level run may include either
weekday activity, weekend activity or both. In this example, only weekday was run. A
temperature of 28.5F and  relative humidity of 69.5 % were also specified.  These are the default
MOVES values for this county, month and hour. However, any appropriate value may be
entered for these parameters.

       More than one pollutant/process combination may be modeled in a given project level
run if the required inputs are entered.  In MOVES, some pollutants are 'chained' to other
pollutants.  This means that they require the prerequisite calculation of another pollutant(s).  If
the pollutant to be modeled in the Project level is a 'chained' pollutant, then a complete set of
Project level inputs must be entered for all of the required prerequisite pollutants. For example,
if you wish to model total PM2.5  emissions, inputs must be entered for elemental carbon, organic
carbon, sulfate and total energy pollutants.

       Currently, MOVES Project level cannot model evaporative emission processes.
However, this capability will be added to future model upgrades.
       For each roadway link, you must specify a MOVES road type which best represents it.  In
this example, the rural unrestricted access road type was chosen to represent both links.  Any of
Page G-2
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

the four roadtypes may be chosen to represent each Project link. You must also specify a link
length in miles for each roadway link you wish to model.  In this case, because the example is
modeling the same roadway in and out of the parking lot, both links are 0.997 miles in length.

       The traffic volume must also be specified for each link.  This is the total average traffic
flow from all vehicle types on the link during the hour period. In this simple example, all of the
vehicles are heavy-duty trucks, but in general, any or all of the MOVES vehicle source types
may be included at the same time in a project level run.

       The average speed on each link must also be specified.  In this example, where drive
schedule inputs are used to represent activity of all of the roadway links, the average speed
inputs in the Links spreadsheet/input GUI tab are used only for internal calculations in the
project level model to determine the source hours operating (i.e., how long does it take to
traverse the link). However, they should match the overall average speed(s) of the individual
drive  cycles as submitted in the LinkDriveSchedule tab. In this case, both the inbound and
outbound links had the same average speed of 28.5 mph. It is your responsibility to ensure they
match - no automatic checks are done.

       The average road grade (in percent grade units) may also be specified for each link. This
input  represents the overall average grade of the entire link not one specific section of it. It is
used only if a drive schedule input is not provided (i.e., it will NOT be used in this example).
However, in this example, the values of 0.857 and -0.857 percent were entered as placeholders
(the actual average of each second of the drive schedule inbound and outbound).

       In this example, MOVES will use second-by-second driving schedules to model vehicle
operation. If drive schedules are not provided, MOVES uses the average speed and average
grade inputs plus default MOVES driving cycles  to model the driving behavior. When drive
schedules are entered, different emission results may be produced even if the average speed or
average grade of the driving schedules  match the average speed/grade input entered in  the Links
spreadsheet tab.

       Figure G2 shows the two driving schedules of this example project in graphical form.
Link 1 - inbound shown in blue, has vehicles entering the parking lot at 30 mph and eventually
coming to a stop. Link 2 - outbound shown in dotted pink has driving starting at zero mph and
accelerating to a 30 mph cruise.  These are simple idealized cycles that are for illustration only.
Note that the  two cycles overlap each other at 30  mph on the figure, and are consequently hard to
read.  The driving schedule data and the chart are contained in the input workbook
Project_Examplel_input.xls  in the  worksheets DriveScheduleSecondLink and Link Drive
Schedule Chart.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                              Page G-3

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
Figure G2
                        Speed / Time Trace for Example Links
      35
      30
      25
  I20
  T3
   CD  A r-
   CD  15
   Q.
  C/)
      10
       0
         0       20       40       60       80
                                 Time (seconds)
  100
120
       The distribution of the traffic by MOVES source type is an additional input.  It is entered
as the SourceTypeHourFraction in the LinkSourceType worksheet, and the LinkSourceType
input tab.  In this example, because only heavy-duty long-haul trucks are to be modeled, all of
the values for SourceTypeHourFraction are set to unity.

       For this example, the off-network parameters are shown in Table G2.  These four
parameters include a vehicle population of 200 vehicles in the parking lot on average during the
hour period. This input is an average value over the one hour time period, because some
vehicles may have been in the lot at all times while others entered or exiting during the hour
period. In this example, the start fraction is set to three percent (0.03).  This is the fraction of the
average vehicle population which were started during the hour. If all of the vehicles in the lot on
average are started, then this value is unity (1.0). It may also be greater than unity if large
numbers vehicles  are repeatedly started during the period.

       The extended idle and parked vehicle fraction parameters were set to 0.90 and 0.09
respectively, for this example.  The 90 percent input for extended idle reflects the fact that 90
percent of the total vehicle - hours (only one hour by definition) in the parking lot were spent in
extended idle mode (vehicles are parked in a lot with their engines idling at higher than curb idle
speeds). The 9 percent input for parking reflects the fact that 9 percent of the total vehicle -
hours in the parking lot were spent in park mode (vehicle is parked and the engine is off). The
sum of extended idling and parking cannot be greater than unity.  Currently, the parked vehicle
input is not active in any of the calculations, but a valid entry must be provided anyway.
Page G-4
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
Table G2
Summary of Off-Network Project Level Parameters
Average Vehicle Population
Start Fraction
Extended Idle Fraction
Parked Vehicle Fraction
200 vehicles in the parking
lot on average
0.03
0.90
0.09
       The operating mode distribution for the parking lot link must be entered. This is a
distribution by AVERAGE vehicle 'soak' time (i.e., the time since a vehicle was last started).
For example, Table G3 below shows that 5 percent of the vehicles in the parking lot have not
been started for more than 720 minutes or 12 hours. Extended Idle operating model fraction is
always set to unity (1.00) when it is present because it is the only operating mode of its type.
This input should not be confused with the off network parameter called Extended Idle Fraction
with a value of 0.90 that is shown in Table G2.
Table G3
Operating Mode Distribution Parameters for Start and
Extended Idle Processes
OpmodelD
Code
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
200
Operating Mode Description
Soak Time < 6 minutes
6 minutes <= Soak Time < 30 minutes
30 minutes <= Soak Time < 60 minutes
60 minutes <= Soak Time < 90 minutes
90 minutes <= Soak Time < 120 minutes
120 minutes <= Soak Time < 360 minutes
360 minutes <= Soak Time < 720 minutes
720 minutes <= Soak Time
Extended Idle Operating Mode
Operating Mode Fraction
0.00
0.05
0.30
0.10
0.50
0.00
0.00
0.05
1.00
       Table G4 shows the source type age distribution for the vehicles in the project. In this
example, there is only one source type (heavy-duty long haul trucks) present. Thus, only one age
distribution is required. Additional age distributions would be required if additional source types
were present. The age distribution runs from age zero (brand new) to 30 years.  All ages greater
than 30 years are included in the age 30 group.  However, in this example, the fraction of
vehicles from 20 to 30 years old is zero.  The distribution must sum to unity within a source
type.  Note that the project level model does not allow separate age distributions for different
fuel types if the same source type is selected. For example, the same age distribution would be
used for both gasoline and diesel long haul trucks if both were present in the project.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
     Page G-5

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
Table G4
Source Type Age Distribution
Source Type
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
agelD
0
1
2
O
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
ageFraction
0.2
0.15
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.07
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Example Data Creation and Input

      A MOVES RunSpec (Project_Examplel.mrs) was created to model this example
MOVES Project level analysis.  For this example, you should load the RunSpec - Project_
Examplel.mrs.

      Note that a Project level run MUST contain only ONE:

                 •  County
                 •  Year
                 •  Month
                 •  Hour
Page G-6
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

       The example RunSpec was further simplified to include only one sourcetype, two
roadtypes, one weekday/weekend combination and three pollutant/process combinations. The
RunSpec is provided as an example and you should use it to become more familiar with this
example.

       The Project level importer is accessed by either selecting Project Data Manager from
the Preprocessing menu item at the top of the GUI, or pressing the Enter/Edit Data button on
the Geographic Bounds panel.  After one of these selections is made, the Project level importer
screen will open.

XCaution!   In general, you should complete ALL of the RunSpec entries (i.e., Scale, Time,
             Geographic Bounds, etc) BEFORE accessing the Project Data Manager.

       The first input step is to create the Project Level database where the imported data is
stored. This is a MySQL database and it is named Project_Examplel_input in this example.

       Load the data into the Project Level database (i.e. Project_Examplel_input) for each
input tab by browsing for the individual file (use the Browse button), and once found, pressing
the Import button to import the data into MOVES. A message diagnostic of "Import Complete"
will be issued, and the GUI tab should turn from red to green if the data import was successful.
This process is repeated for each of the tabs until no more red tabs are present. Various
diagnostic messages are provided if the import was not successful.  The data should be
"Browsed" and "Imported" from the Excel workbook Project_Examplel_input.xls.

       The inputs are in the spreadsheets:

       o  Drive ScheduleSecondLink
       o  OffNetworkLink
       o  ZoneMonthHour
       o  I/M
       o  LinkSourceTypeHour
       o  SourcetypeAgeDistribution
       o  Fuel
       o  Link
       o  OpModeDistribution

       After the data loading process is complete, press Done to save the data in the database;
this will exit the Project Level data manager. As a final step, you may be required to go to the
Geographic Panel tab and choose the new Project Level database (Project_Examplel_input)
from a list of databases. If the new database is not visible, click Refresh.

       The Excel input file Project_Examplel.xls and the MOVES project level input database
Project_Examplel_input are provided in the MOVES package  to assist you.  If you "Browse"
and "Import" data from the spreadsheet, Project_Examplel.xls, your final database should be the
same as Project_Examplel_input.

       In this example, all of the inputs for the Project Level were read from a single Excel
workbook. This was done to make the process easier for the first time user, and to facilitate with

United States Environmental Protection Agency                                             Page G-J

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
simple "Browse" and "Import" data entry. However, if you're starting from scratch with a
project, it is recommended you use the Create Template button or the Export Default button
for each of the Project Level input tabs. This will create a set of Excel workbook templates or
default data spreadsheets (with a set of individual worksheets - one for each input tab).  Populate
or modify these templates or data tables with the actual data.  The spreadsheets within each
template provide necessary descriptions of the data fields and moves codes (i.e., countylD codes,
fuelformulationID codes, roadtypelD codes, hourDaylD codes and sourcetypelD codes). The
MOVES project level importer will show a list of all of the individual Excel worksheets from an
Excel workbook. Pick the 'active'  worksheet (usually the leftmost worksheet in the workbook or
the first  spreadsheet entry in the MOVES importer) as  an input.

      After using the Project level importer, notice that the DriveScheduleSecondLink and the
opmodeDistribution table need not exist together for all of the roadtype links. In this example,
the DriveScheduleSecondLink table contains an average speed-time 'trace' for both roadway
links. It is used by MOVES to internally create an opmodeDistribution for each roadway link.
A separate opmodeDistribution for the road links is not required to be supplied, but could have
been supplied in-lieu of the DriveScheduleSecondLink data input.  The opmodeDistribution is
always required for the start operation parameters (table 3 contains the inputs). It contains  the
opmodeDistribution for the NOx emission starts. These values are used to differentiate start
soak times.

      Alternatively, either a DriveScheduleSecondLink or the OpModeDistribution table  must
be provided. You may simply specify an average speed for each link in the Links table. If this
option is utilized, MOVES  selects two default  driving schedules and uses the average speed
input to  interpolate between the two cycles to create a new default cycle for that average speed.
MOVES Results for the Example

       The results for this simple MOVES Project Level simulation are reported in the MySQL
   database ProjectLevel_Output.  They are summarized in Table G5 by issuing the following
   MySQL command in the MySQL Query browser:

       SELECT MOVESRunID,  pollutantID,  processID,
   linklDMOVESRunlDpollutantlDprocessIDlinklDlinkID, sum(emissionquant)
       as e FROM  project  examplel  output.movesoutput m
       group by movesrunid,  pollutantid, processid, linkid;
Table GS
MOVES Project Level Example Simulation Results
LinkID
1
2
O
O
Link Description
Inbound Road
Outbound Road
Parking Lot (extended idle)
Parking Lot (start)
NOx emissions (grams)
1266.54
57.73
48841.61
18.92
Page G-8
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

       The emissions are reported as an 'inventory' for the project and are broken down by
linkID (roadway and off-network - you must specify that the results to be reported by roadway
and process in the Runspec). In this example, the results are reported in units of grams of NOx
emissions. The time domain for the Project Level is always one hour. Remember that these
results are average results over the one hour time domain and the geographic link domain.  One
reason project level reports 'average' results is because the model's calculation methodology
assumes (for simplicity) independence of the individual links in the project, and does not
dynamically calculate traffic flows between links or residence times in off network (you must do
this step before the data is entered into the MOVES project level simulator).

       The large difference in NOx emission inventories between two physically similar links
(link 1 and link 2) is because of the large difference in traffic volumes. The traffic volume  for
link 1 is an order of magnitude greater than the traffic volume for link 2. The relatively small
amount of NOx emissions from the start process is the result of a very low start fraction input
(i.e. 3 percent).  The relatively large amount  of emissions from the extended idle process reflects
a fairly high fraction of extended idle operation (i.e. 90 percent). In comparison, the running
operation of the inbound road contains half as many vehicles (100 vehicles versus 200 in
extended idle), and the running operation on average lasts only  about 2 minutes per vehicle
versus the entire hour for 90 percent of the vehicles.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                              Page G-9

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
MOVES Project Example #2

       This example (the inputs are in Excel Spreadsheet ProjectExample2_input.xls) has
virtually all of the same inputs as Project Example #1 discussed in Sections 1 through 4.  As a
result none of the data and explanations will be repeated.  The only difference between the two
examples is the ACTIVE use of the Average Speed input in this example instead of the
DriveSchedule inputs.  The purpose of this brief example is to show that different results for
roadway links are obtained from the two different methods of modeling vehicle operation.

       In this example, the average speed input of 28.5 mph is imported and used for Link 1 and
28.5 mph is used for Link 2.  Likewise, the average grade inputs for Linkl and Link2 are 0.857
percent and -0.857 percent, respectively. These inputs are in the Links tab. The average
speed/average grade inputs become ACTIVE in MOVES when the specific drive schedule inputs
shown in Figure  1 are NOT imported/used by the Driveschedule Importer GUI. If the drive
schedule data (or operating mode distribution data for roadway links) are imported, they
automatically over-ride the average speed inputs in the Links tab.

       Instead of user supplied drive schedules being used to represent vehicle operation, built-
in default drive schedules that bracket the average speed inputs (in this case 28.5 mph) are used
when average speed inputs are entered.  Likewise, the average grade values of 0.857 or -0.857
percent are assumed for the entire length of the links rather than the varying road grades used in
Example  1. The  results shown in Tables G5 and G5 for links 1 and 2 definitely show that the
two input types (specific drive schedule and average speed/grade) are not necessarily equivalent.
Table G6
MOVES Project Level Example Simulation Results
LinkID
1
2
3
3
Link Description
Inbound Road
Outbound Road
Parking Lot (extended idle)
Parking Lot (start)
NOx emissions (grams)
1696.47
117.47
48841.61
18.92
MOVES Project Example #3

       This example briefly presents and discusses several real world ramp cycles developed
under contract for EPA. These are provided because the Project Level does not contain default
data for modeling freeway ramps. Entering an average speed/grade in the Project Level Links
importer will not model a freeway ramp. The only way you can model a freeway ramp using the
Project Level is to enter a ramp drive schedule in the DriveSchedule importer or a roadtype
operating mode distribution using the OpmodeDistribution input tab.

       The attached Excel  spreadsheet, Ramp_Driving_Cycles.xls, contains several real world
drive schedules for various ramp configurations. They are based on a 2004 Sacramento,
California driving study. These schedules do not model any actual real world project, but serve
as realistic examples of ramp operation.  They also function as a starting point to develop actual
cycles that precisely fit the needs of a specific project.  They can be used in MOVES Project (or
Page G-10
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

modified for use) by defining a new ramp LinkID (i.e. Rampl, Ramp2, etc) and populating the
DriveSchedule importer with a speed-grade/time trace based on ramp driving operation.

       The Summary table in the Ramp_Driving_Cycles.xls spreadsheet lists the ramp
configuration type, the grade change toggle and the ramp metering designation.  The table
includes only "on-ramps". No data is available for "off-ramps". Ramps may be configured in
several ways with different operating behavior occurring on each.  The most prominent types are
the "Diamond" configuration or the "Loop" or "Cloverloop" configuration. The "Diamond"
configuration typically has higher speed and acceleration operation than the "Loop"
configuration.  A ramp may also be "metered" by a traffic light at the end of the ramp that
controls access to the freeway. The final ramp configuration is the "Transition" ramp. It occurs
when one freeway transitions to another freeway.  The individual cycles are also denoted by the
general grade change of the ramp. Three possibilities are provided for the "Diamond" and
"Loop" configurations.

       Open the Project Manager (under the Pre-Processing Menu) in the Link Drive
Schedules, click Create Template. This will create a spreadsheet you can fill in using sample
data from Ramp_Driving_Cycle spreadsheet. For instance, choose the OR_D-L tab and copy the
Time and Speed column data into the Second ID and Speed columns of the template. Then use
Link Id = 1 and Grade = 0. Save the template and use the Import button to bring into the
RunSpec.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                            Page G-ll

-------

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

Appendix H - County Data Manager Example

Explanation of Scenario 3

       The County Data Manager is expected to be used extensively, particularly by
nonattainment or maintenance areas when conducting SIP or conformity analyses. This tool
provides the ability to import and edit local data, rather than using MOVES defaults. This
appendix also goes through the MOVESOutput table in the MySQL Query Browser to provide
some basic queries used for your own analyses.

       In this scenario, the County Data Manager is used to construct a RunSpec using area-
specific data.  The area being modeled will be a custom domain.  While there are some
differences between using the custom domain option and selecting an individual county, the
basic operation of the County Data Manager is the same. Where differences exist, this scenario
describes how a custom domain and a single county are treated differently.

Constructing the RunSpec

       The custom domain in this scenario is named "Example City" and is an ozone
nonattainment area, so the selections and use of the County Data Manager reflect that
assumption.  On the Pollutants and Processes panel, all processes for Volatile Organic Carbons
(VOCs) and Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) are selected because these pollutants are associated with
the formation of ground-level ozone.  If VOCs are selected, several other pollutants and
processes must be selected as well because they are needed when calculating VOC emissions.
Therefore, this run contains a fair number of pollutant-processes and will take a fair amount of
time to run (about 16 minutes on a computer with a dual-core processor), but the variety of the
output will be useful later when analyzing the output in the MySQL Query Browser. If you
simply want practice with the process of using the County Data Manager and importing files, it
is recommended that you select only NOx processes on the Pollutants and Processes panel as
evaporative emissions of hydrocarbons take the most time in MOVES.

       The RunSpec should be filled out in its entirety before the County Data Manager is used.
In this example, selections are limited to reduce the run-time of the RunSpec, but some variation
is included to emphasize how output can be post-processed in MySQL.

       Open the file examplecity_2013 July.mrs (located in the
c:\Program Files\MOVES20120118\USER_Guide_Example_Files\City Example folder
) to view the RunSpec and to create an output database using the General output panel (e.g.
examplecity_2013 July_out). Then select the RunSpec Geographic Bounds panel and select
Region Custom Domains. Notice that it requires you to provide additional information about the
area.  You can change any of these fields (except County ID, set to 1, because the input files
have countyID=99001), but should be aware that doing so will result in different emission
results. Next, click the Enter/Edit Data button to open the County Data Manager window.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                             Page H-l

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

Using the County Data Manager

      With the County Data Manager open, name and create a user-input database (e.g.
examplecity_2013 _july_in).

XCaution!  If any changes are made to the RunSpec after the database has been created, the
             database may no longer be correct for the revised RunSpec. This is because some
             core tables are populated based on the selections in the RunSpec at the time of the
             creation of the database and these core tables can only be changed directly in
             MySQL (i.e., there are no tabs to edit these core tables). Take care in changing
             the RunSpec while using an existing database and always double-check the tab
             headers to ensure all the necessary data has been provided after making a change
             to the RunSpec.

      Next, notice that the Generic, Ramp Fraction, Zone Road Activity, and I/M Programs
tabs all start with green  checks for different reasons.  For Ramp Fraction, the default fraction
of 8% of VHT is applied if no data is imported on this tab, but you can import new values if
desired.   The Zone Road Activity tab  erroneously shows a green check, but  data MUST be
imported for MOVES to calculate results properly; a value of 1 should be entered for the
SHOAllocFactor for each road type so that all of the VMT input is assigned to the custom
domain.  Finally, the I/M Programs tab  starts with a green check because there are no default
programs in the custom domain that have to be accounted for. Of these 4 tabs, data will be
imported for Zone Road Activity and I/M Programs.

      For all other tabs, files containing the area-specific data must be imported. The importing
process is the same for all the tabs, so  it is explained generally in the next paragraph. The Excel
files containing the example area-specific data are included as part of the MOVES installation
pack and have the following naming convention:

          o  examplecity_2013 JulyJTABNAME] .xls

      You can open the files before importing them to view how the data is formatted and can
refer to the supporting worksheets for  clarification on the numerical codes or abbreviations.
Notice that for some files, wildcards are used to greatly reduce the number of rows that have to
be entered (e.g. Average Speed Distribution - 64 with wildcards vs. 11,520 without).
Page H-2                                              United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                            March 2012
       To import the files, click the Browse button. Then, find where the file is saved, and select
the appropriate file for the tab (i.e. if working in the Age Distribution tab, select the file
"examplecity_2013july_agedistribution.xls").  After the file has been selected, a small pop-up
window appears:
                                   Choose XLS Work.
                                 elect the Worksheet to read
                                 ourceTypeAgeDistribution
                                 UjeCategory
                                 lOurceUseType
                                  OK
Cancel
       Select the correct worksheet (in this example, it will generally be the first worksheet
listed and will usually have a name similar to the tab name) and click OK.  For the Vehicle Type
VMT tab, there are four worksheets within the file "examplecity_2013July_vehicletypevmt.xls"
that should be imported: HPMSVTypeYear, monthVMTFraction, dayVMTFraction, and
hourVMTFraction. The names of the worksheets correspond to the names of the database tables
for which data is being provided.

       Next, click the Import button.  The Messages box should say which table was imported
and Import Complete.  If there were problems with the import, error messages here would
describe the problem. In case of error, revise the input file, save the changes, and then click the
Clear Imported Data button before reattempting the import.

       The above pop-up dialog box is an example where one worksheet is selected from one
Excel file, which is typical. However, importing data from the Vehicle Type VMT tab requires
that the vehicletypevmt.xls file be selected 4 times (once each for year, month day and hour data)
and all 4 types of data are imported separately.

       Once all the files are imported, the database tables are populated. Click Done in the
County Data Manager to return to the Geographic Bounds panel.  Make sure the user-input
database is selected in the Domain Input Database section of the Geographic Bounds panel.
The RunSpec and county-input database are completed, so the RunSpec can be executed by
selecting Execute from the Action drop-down menu.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                 Page H-3

-------
March 2012
                                           MOVES2010b User Guide
Analyzing the Results in the MySQL Query Browser

       First, a brief summary of the major pieces of the MySQL Query Browser:
  Fie  Ed* View  Query Script  Tot*
     O RetuRset 1
                                              Query Area
       I SELECT • FROH  cm»»pl*eity_2013_juVy_O«f .

                                                             >
                                            Schemaf    L'lSt Of
                                                    Databases
                                                    and Tables
iurDa*i>Tn»
2003-12.1709:42:05
stale
Inv
                                                           15834
  <
                                                             >
                                                         >>S.«k
                                                                  -j
                                                                  * J
                                                                  > ~
                                                                  » __ ,
                                           u
                                                                                     v
                                                                Synta*

                                                                 _
                                                                 .
                                                                 cj M»6QL Utlty SWemefXs
                                                                 I
                                                                 i_, SQL Syftw for Prepared Sl*etn«nl;j
  1:   I
The top left box is the Query Area, bottom left is the Data Area, and top right is the List of
Databases/Tables.  The tables within a database can be revealed by clicking the black triangle
just to the left of the database name.  There are queries below that have the following syntax:

       SELECT  *  FROM Nexamplecity_2013_july_outN.N[table] N;

These queries can be auto-generated by dragging the table name from the right-hand List of
Tables and dropping it in the Query Area or Data Area. If the table name is dropped in the
Query Area, the text for the query is generated, but the query itself is not executed; so you must
either click the Execute button (lightning bolt) or press CTRL  + Enter. However, if the table
name is dropped in the Data Area, the query will be generated in the Query Area and auto-
executed with results immediately appearing in the Data Area.

       Now that some of the basics have been covered, the results from the example can be
analyzed. Listed below are MySQL Queries and some discussion of the results they generate.
You can copy and paste the queries into the Query Area of MySQL as long as the output
database name is "examplecity_2013 July_out"; if you provided a different output database
name, that name should be used wherever "examplecity_2013 July_out" appears.
Page H-4
                                 United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES201 Ob User Guide                                                   March 2012
1)     SELECT * FROM "examplecity_2013_july_out".Nmoveserror";

       Look at the MOVESError log to make sure the run executed normally. There should be
no results from this query.

2)     SELECT * FROM "examplecity_2013_july_out".Nmovesrun";

       The MOVESRun table gives some basic information about the RunSpec, the description,
the date and length of time, etc. If there are multiple runs in the database, there will be multiple
MOVESRunID entries here.

3)     SELECT * FROM "examplecity_2013_july_out".Nmovesactivityoutput";

       The MOVESActivityOutput table contains all the activity results  from the RunSpec and
should have 1446 rows (there is a bar below the data area that tells you how many rows a query
returns). In the RunSpec, the distance traveled  and population options were selected. Both of
these values were inputs, so ensure the input values were carried through to the output correctly.
Population is easier, so look at that first.

4)     SELECT sourcetypelD,   SUM(activity) AS  population
       FROM  Nexamplecity 2013 July outN."movesactivityoutputN
       WHERE activityTypeID=6
       GROUP BY sourceTypelD
       ORDER BY sourceTypelD;

       Notice the query became more complicated.  The first line is the SELECT statement,
which states the fields from the table that will be displayed.  Since population is not time
dependent and you're only looking at one county, the only important field is the sourcetypelD
itself; however, a sum of the  activity is required because output was differentiated by fuel type.
The SUM(activity) is renamed in the resulting table "AS population".  The  second line is the
FROM statement, which identifies the database and table that should be used. The third line is
the WHERE clause, which specifies that only activityTypeID=6 should be used when querying
the table (since you're just looking at population). The fourth line is the GROUP BY clause,
which is used when a sum is  calculated.  Since the clause states, "GROUP BY sourceTypelD",
all data of different source types are kept separated, but any data within the same source type is
summed (so the different populations for each fuel type will be added together). The final row is
the ORDER BY clause, which states the order in which the resulting information will appear.

       The resulting table from this query should have just 3 rows and the populations should be
(after rounding) 500,000; 300,000; and 50,000 for source types 21, 31  and 32, respectively.
These values match the populations that were imported.

5)     SELECT daylDdaylDdaylD, sourceTypelD,  SUM(activity)*dayID*31/7 AS
       PortionofMonthVMT
       FROM  Nexamplecity 2013 July outN."movesactivityoutputN
       WHERE sourceTypeID=21 AND activitytypeid=l
       GROUP BY daylD
       ORDER BY daylD;
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                            Page H-5

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

      This statement is the first step to calculate the VMT for passenger cars
(sourceTypeID=21), but doing so is not a straight-forward process and that can be seen in the
SUM statement above. Notice that the GROUP BY clause only has daylD, because the WHERE
clause identifies that only 1 sourceTypelD will be queried. Grouping by sourceTypelD is not
necessary, but would not affect the query if it were included. The temporal output for the
RunSpec is hour, so that means the VMT output was originally for one hour of one of the types
of days;  therefore, the VMT should be summed within the day ID to get the total for that type of
day.  Then, this query adds two additional steps: 1) by multiplying by the daylD, the  product is
the VMT on that type of day in a week; and 2) by multiplying by 31/7 (the number of days in
July divided by the  number of days in the days in a week), which is the number of weeks in July.
This  second product gives the VMT on that type of day in the entire month.

      The resulting table should have just 2 rows as can be seen in the table below.  An
additional column has been added using an Excel spreadsheet to sum the VMT from  the two
types of days:
daylD
2
5
sourceTypelD
21
21
PortionofMonthVMT
1.21E+08
3.44E+08
Month VMT

4.65E+08
       The monthVMTFraction table assigned a value of 1 to July, so the VMT that was input
was essentially a monthly VMT for July and we can see that the Month VMT is equal to the value
that was input for JdPMSVTypelD of 20 (examplecity_2013July_vehicletypevmt.xls, worksheet
"JdPMSVTypeYear").  There are ways to calculate the Month VMT entirely within MySQL, but
that involves either creating tables or using subqueries, which is beyond the scope of this
example. Therefore, once you get to this point, use of an external spreadsheet tool is
recommended, unless you're familiar with more complex MySQL queries.

       More detail is acquired using the query above as a template (e.g. adding "roadtypelD" to
the SELECT, GROUP BY, and ORDER BY clauses to see the VMT on each road type to make
sure the road type distribution was applied correctly; calculating VMT for JdPMSVTypeID=30).
You are encouraged to experiment with the query above to improve your MySQL skills and
better understand how to compare inputs with outputs to ensure the results are logical.

6)     SELECT  *  FROM "examplecity_2013_july_out".Nmovesoutput";

       This table should contain 23432 rows and gives all the emissions output with a significant
amount of detail since output is differentiated by fuel type, emission process, road type, and
source type. Therefore, using MySQL to condense the results holds great potential for
simplifying the post-processing.

7)     SELECT  monthid,  pollutantID, SUM(emissionquant)  AS grams
       FROM Nexamplecity 2013 July outN."movesoutputN
       WHERE dayID=5 AND~pollutantITJ IN  (3,87)
       GROUP BY  daylD,  pollutantlDdaylDpollutantlDpollutantID
       ORDER BY  pollutantID;
Page H-6                                             United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
       This query will greatly simplify the original output table from 23,000 rows to 2, but a
major reason for this is that not all the data is being reported:
month id
7
7
pollutantID
3
87
grams
2.11E+07
1.21E+07
       Some assumptions were made to reduce the reported output that may be similar to those
you make in your analyses, such as only a single weekday is being looked at and the only
pollutants of interest are NOx (3) and VOCs (87).  Notice that in the WHERE clause, a new
command was used, "pollutantID in (3, 87)". The IN command is a more concise way of saying
"pollutantTD=3 AND pollutantTD=87" and can be used with any field that has multiple entries.

       Once again, you are encouraged to vary this query to see the results for different
conditions (e.g. choose other pollutants; see emission results from each source type or on the
different road types; etc.).
United States Environmental Protection Agency
     Page H-7

-------

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
 Appendix I - MOVES Decoder

       Many of the tables used by MOVES contain data that is identified using categorical
values.  These categorical values are described in various tables in the default MOVES database
which contain text corresponding to the categorical values. This appendix lists some of the most
useful descriptions of the categorical values used in MOVES tables.
Road Type
roadTypelD
1
2
3
4
5
roadDesc
Off-Network
Rural Restricted Access
Rural Unrestricted Access
Urban Restricted Access
Urban Unrestricted Access
Fuel Type
fuelTypelD
1
2
3
4
5
9
fuelTypeDesc
Gasoline
Diesel Fuel
Compressed Natural
Liquefied Petroleum
Gas (CNG)
Gas (LPG)
Ethanol
Electricity
Pollutant
ID
1
2
3
5
6
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
40
41
42
43
44
45
Pollutant Name
Total Gaseous Hydrocarbons
Carbon Monoxide (CO)
Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)
Methane (CH4)
Nitrous Oxide (N2O)
Benzene
Ethanol
MTBE
Naphthalene particle
1,3-Butadiene
Formaldehyde
Acetaldehyde
Acrolein
Ammonia (NH3)
Sulfur Dioxide (SO2)
Nitrogen Oxide (NO)
Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2)
2,2,4-Trimethylpentane
Ethyl Benzene
Hexane
Propionaldehyde
Styrene
Toluene
Pollutant
ID
90
91
92
93
98
99
100
101
102
105
106
107
110
111
112
115
116
117
130
131
132
133
134
Pollutant Name
Atmospheric CO2
Total Energy Consumption
Petroleum Energy Consumption
Fossil Fuel Energy Consumption
CO2 Equivalent
Brake Specific Fuel Consumption (BSFC)
Primary Exhaust PM10 -Total
Primary PM10 - Organic Carbon
Primary PM10 - Elemental Carbon
Primary PM10 - Sulfate Particulate
Primary PM10 - Brakewear Particulate
Primary PM10 -Tirewear Particulate
Primary Exhaust PM2.5 - Total
Primary PM2.5 - Organic Carbon
Primary PM2.5 - Elemental Carbon
Primary PM2.5 - Sulfate Particulate
Primary PM2.5 - Brakewear Particulate
Primary PM2.5 -Tirewear Particulate
1,2,3, 7,8,9-Hexachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin
Octachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-Heptachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin
Octachlorodibenzofuran
1,2,3,4, 7,8-Hexachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin
United States Environmental Protection Agency
      Page 1-1

-------
March 2012
           MOVES2010b User Guide
Pollutant
ID
46
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69

70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
86
87
Pollutant Name
Xylene
Mercury Elemental Gaseous
Mercury Divalent Gaseous
Mercury Particulate
Arsenic Compounds
Chromium 3+
Chromium en-
Manganese Compounds
Nickel Compounds
Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene particle
Fluoranthene particle

Acenaphthene particle
Acenaphthylene particle
Anthracene particle
Benz(a)anthracene particle
Benzo(a)pyrene particle
Benzo(b)fluoranthene particle
Benzo(g,h,i)perylene particle
Benzo(k)fluoranthene particle
Chrysene particle
Non-Methane Hydrocarbons
Non-Methane Organic Gases
Fluorene particle
lndeno(l,2,3,c,d)pyrene particle
Phenanthrene particle
Pyrene particle
Total Organic Gases
Volatile Organic Compounds
Pollutant
ID
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145

146
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
181
182
183
184
185
Pollutant Name
1,2,3,7,8-Pentachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin
2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzofuran
1,2,3,4,7,8,9-Heptachlorodibenzofuran
2,3,4,7,8-Pentachlorodibenzofuran
1,2,3,7,8-Pentachlorodibenzofuran
1,2,3,6,7,8-Hexachlorodibenzofuran
1,2,3,6,7,8-Hexachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin
2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin
2,3,4,6,7,8-Hexachlorodibenzofuran
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-Heptachlorodibenzofuran
1,2,3,4,7,8-Hexachlorodibenzofuran

1,2,3, 7,8,9-Hexachlorodibenzofuran
Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene gas
Fluoranthene gas
Acenaphthene gas
Acenaphthylene gas
Anthracene gas
Benz(a)anthracene gas
Benzo(a)pyrene gas
Benzo(b)fluoranthene gas
Benzo(g,h,i)perylene gas
Benzo(k)fluoranthene gas
Chrysene gas
Fluorene gas
lndeno(l,2,3,c,d)pyrene gas
Phenanthrene gas
Pyrene gas
Naphthalene gas
Page 1-2
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
Appendix J - Configuring MOVES

       This appendix discusses some technical details associated with MOVES configuration,
DOS Command Line instructions and ANT options.
       MOVES may be configured beyond the default configuration built by the MOVES2010b
Installation Suite (shown in Figure J.I). Note that this appendix is meant for advanced users
who are thoroughly familiar with MOVES and who desire ways to obtain maximum
performance from MOVES.

       All MOVES application components may be installed on a single computer system as
shown in Figure J. 1.
                                      Computer 1
              MySQL Server
               User Input

              MOVESdefault

             MOVESExecution

              MOVESOutput

              MGVESWorker
                                                Master/GUI
                                                 Program
                                                 Worker
                                                 Program
                        Figure J. 1  MOVES Default configuration

       MOVES may also be configured so that several computers work together to execute
model simulation runs. This can significantly improve execution time performance of large
simulations.  Improvements diminish, however, as more worker computers are added. The
number of worker computers needed to approach the minimal execution time for a model run
depends on the specific nature of the run.

       For several computers to work together on a MOVES run, all that is necessary is for the
computers to have access to the SharedWork directory. For one computer, this file directory can
be on its local hard drive; other computers must access the SharedWork directory via a computer
network. The platform requirements of each MOVES component must still be satisfied by the
computer(s) on which it is installed.  A variety of network configurations are possible. The
principal consideration is that each Master/GUI Program must have the MOVESDefault database
on its computer and that each Worker Program must be able to create a MOVESWorker database
on its computer.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
      Page J-l

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
       Two text files, MOVESConfiguration.txt, and WorkerConfiguration.txt (versions of
which are built by the MOVES installation program), are used by the MOVES Master/GUI
program and the MOVES Worker program to locate their databases and the SharedWork
directory. Figure J.2 shows a typical Multiple Computer configuration.
                                        "Vl-lKI IWl 3 -1
                      Figure J-2. Moves multi-computer configuration
Page J-2
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

New Advanced Grid Operations

       The following new features were developed and added to MOVES to enhance LINUX
cluster and GRID (PC-based) usage:

   •   All of the MOVES components, Master, Worker, and MySQL can run on separate
       computing nodes;

   •   MOVES can now work with a non-local MySQL server. This is useful for a centralized
       default database, but not recommended for multiple worker and master execution
       databases due to contention on the server's hard drive I/O bus;

   •   MOVES can start and/or stop a local MySQL server without needing MySQL to be pre-
       installed as a daemon/service and without requiring administrator privileges;

   •   MOVES can start a master that will only produce TODO files then exit (optionally
       combined with the start/stop of a local MySQL);

   •   MOVES can start N workers simultaneously on a single node and optionally have those
       workers quit when they run out of TODO files (optionally combined with the start/stop of
       a local MySQL);

   •   MOVES masters can process DONE files for other masters (optionally combined with
       the start/stop of a local MySQL), storing them to an output database (either local or
       centralized); and,

   •   MOVES now has simplified environment variables.  Only Java and ANT must in the path
       and the ANT script sets the class path.  This ensures that MOVES runs only need relative
       paths, hoping to make shell scripting MOVES easier.  This also allows a work flow of
       TODO creation,  TODO processing into DONE files, and DONE file storage, making
       batched/queued processing much easier to accomplish.

       These features are implemented within the ANT script that MOVES uses (build.xml),
making all features  portable between Windows and Linux.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                              Page J-3

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

Configuring MOVES for Use with Multiple Workers
       The following sections describe typical configurations and additional functionality that
assist with using MOVES in the command line, batched, shared environment of a typical Linux-
based or GRID cluster.  These sections describe command line options for which there are often
no GUI counterparts. A command line refresher may be found in Appendix C - Running
MOVES from the Command Line. The setup of a local copy of MySQL, one that does not
require a preinstalled service/daemon on each computing node, is also described.

Quick Setup of 2 Workers

       To quickly start 2 concurrent workers on either Linux or Windows using the default
MOVES configuration, follow these steps. Subsequent sections will outline other possible
configurations.

   1)  Edit the "manyworkers.txt" file to use the same shared directory as is set in the
       "MOVESConfiguration.txt" file.
   2)  Start a command line and CD to the directory containing your MOVES installation, such
       as C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\
   3)  At the command line, type:  setenv.bat
   4)  At the command line, type:  ant-Dnoshutdown=l 2workers

       Two worker windows will start and stay running. Do not close the command line
window.
Page J-4                                             United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

Choosing a Configuration

Configuration 1: "Silo" with Local MySQL

       A Silo configuration places both a master and one or more workers on a single computer.
Variations include the number of concurrent workers and serial or concurrent execution of the
master and worker(s). The default configuration of MOVES is a silo with local MySQL with
one worker running concurrently with the master.

       To implement Configuration 1 on a single computer node:

       1)  Ensure Java is available.

       2)  Edit maketodo.txt which was installed along with the MOVES source code.  Ensure
          the defaultDatabaseName value is  the name of the database you will be using.  Ensure
          sharedDistributedFolderPath value is the  correct location of the directory your master
          and workers will use.

       3)  Edit manyworkers.txt which was installed along with the MOVES source code
          ensuring the sharedDistributedFolderPath value is the correct location of the directory
          your master and workers will use.

       4)  Install MySQL onto the computing node you will be using or create a version that can
          be used without installation. A "no-installation" version is provided with the
          Windows version of MOVES (under the "mysql" folder within the MOVES base
          installation directory).  But, installing on Linux will require compiling a version of
          MySQL that has default directories that are actually available on your computing
          node.  Such compilation is beyond the scope of this document.

       5)  Within your MOVES  code folder,  create a PDSpec XML file named "pickupall.xml"
          suitable for use in your environment and name a specific database to hold the results.
          Set the  entry to the name of your shared work folder. Such a file is:

             
                    
                           *
                           c:\moves\sharedwork
                           
                    
             

       To use Configuration 1:

          1) Set the JAVA_HOME environment variable to the location of your Java
             installation, such as:
          2) C:\Program Files (x86)\Java\jdkl.7.0.

          3) Set the ANT_HOME environment variable to the location of your MOVES ant
             folder, such as:


United States Environmental Protection Agency                                              Page J-5

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

          4) C:\MOVES\ant.

          5) Set the PATH environment variable to include JAVA_HOME\bin and
             ANT_HOME\bin.

          6) Execute any of the MOVES ant commands such as "ant -r RUNSPEC"
Configuration 2:  Silo with Local MySQL, Serial Master and Two Workers

       The Silo with Local MySQL, Serial Master and Two Workers configuration places a
single master, a MySQL instance, and two workers on a single computer. The workers execute
after the master, allowing TODO and DONE files to be preserved as well as the output database.
When the workers complete and DONE files picked up, no further calculations are needed on the
RunSpec.  An external scripting tool must be used to execute a series of RunSpecs. A single
instance of MySQL is used, running on the same computer node that runs the master and
workers.  This limits network access and ensures the MySQL security system denies access from
other network nodes - a benefit when securing a large cluster of machines.

       To implement Configuration 2 on a single computer node:

       1)  Ensure Java is available.

       2)  Edit maketodo.txt which was installed along with the MOVES source code. Ensure
          the defaultDatabaseName value is the name of the database you will be using.  Ensure
          sharedDistributedFolderPath value is the correct location of the directory your master
          and workers will use.

       3)  Edit manyworkers.txt which was installed along with the MOVES source code
          ensuring the sharedDistributedFolderPath value is the correct location of the directory
          your master and workers will use.

       4)  Install MySQL onto the computing node you will use or create a version that can be
          used without installation. A "no-installation" version is provided with the Windows
          version of MOVES (under the "mysql" folder within the MOVES base installation
          directory).  But, installing on Linux will require compiling a version of MySQL that
          has default directories that are actually available on your computing node.  Such
          compilation is beyond the scope of this document.

       5)  Within your MOVES code folder, create a PDSpec XML file named "pickupall.xml"
          suitable for use in your environment and name a specific database to hold the results.
          Set the  entry to the name of your shared work folder.  Such a file is:
             
                    
                          *
                          c:\moves\sharedwork
                          
                    
             
Page J-6                                              United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

       To use Configuration 2:

       1)  Set the JAVA_HOME environment variable to the location of your Java installation,
          such as:
                          C:\Program Files (x86)\Java\jdkl.7.0.

       2)  Set the ANT_HOME environment variable to the location of your MOVES ant
          folder, such as:
                                    C:\MOVES\ant.

       3)  Set the PATH environment variable to include JAVA_HOME\bin and
          ANT_HOME\bin.

       4)  Execute the "ant maketodo" command, passing your RunSpec name using the "-
          Drunspec=" parameter, such as:

                   ant -Drunspec=c:\myrunspecs\runspecl.mrs maketodo

       5)  If desired, save all *TODO files from your shared work folder.

       6)  Execute the "ant 2workers" command. This will start 2 concurrent workers which
          will terminate after completing all TODO files.

       7)  If desired, save all *DONE files from your shared work folder.

       8)  Execute the "ant pickup" command, passing your pickupall.xml filename using the
          "-Dpdspec=" parameter, such as:

                           ant -Dpdspec=pickupall.xml pickup

       9)  Copy your output database files to long term storage. The database is the one named
          in the pickupall.xml file, not the one used by the RunSpec.
Configuration 3:  Worker Pool with Local MySQL

       This configuration places multiple workers and an instance of MySQL on each
computing node. An instance of MySQL is used running on the same computer node that runs
the workers.  This limits network access and ensures the MySQL security system denies access
from other network nodes - a benefit when securing a large cluster of machines.

       To implement Configuration 3:

       1)  Ensure Java is available.

       2)  Edit manyworkers.txt which was installed along with the MOVES source code.
          Ensure the sharedDistributedFolderPath value is the correct location of the directory
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                              Page J-7

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

          your masters and workers will use. This will be a network accessible directory since
          external masters will deposit TODO files and retrieve DONE files from this location.

       3)  Install MySQL onto each computing node you will be using or create a version that
          can be used without installation.  Such a no-installation version is provided with the
          Windows version of MOVES (under the "mysql" folder within the MOVES base
          installation directory), but under Linux will require compiling a version of MySQL
          that has default directories that are actually available on your nodes. Such
          compilation is beyond the scope of this document.

       To use Configuration 3:

       1)  Set the JAVA_HOME environment variable to the location of your Java installation,
          such as:
                          C:\Program Files (x86)\Java\jdkl.7.0.

       2)  Set the ANT_HOME environment variable to the location of your MOVES' ant
          folder,  such as:
                                    C:\MOVES\ant.

       3)  Set the PATH environment variable  to include JAVA_HOME\bin and
          ANT_HOME\bin.

       4)  Execute the "ant 2workers" command with the "-Dnoshutdown=l" parameter. This
          will start 2 concurrent workers which will never terminate. Example:

                             ant -Dnoshutdown=l 2workers
Page J-8                                              United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                            March 2012
New Ant Tasks and MOVES Command Line Options

       MOVES2010b's use of Ant has been expanded to include features normally
accomplished with shell scripts, thereby bringing these features to all platforms. In addition,
production-related Ant tasks now set their class paths internally using relative directories. Such
tasks, such as "2workers", only require the calling shell script to set a path to Java and Ant.
Ant Task
Description
Startmysql
Utility to start a local MySQL instance if another instance is
not already running.	
Stopmysql
Utility to stop any MySQL server using the standard localhost
port 3306. This will stop MySQL started with the
"startmysql" task or any preexisting MySQL service/daemon.
1 worker
Use a local copy of MySQL and a single local worker using
the manyworkers.txt configuration file and -autoshutdown
worker command line option.
The Ant flag "-Dnoshutdown=l" can also be given. See the
full description in the multiple workers section below.
2workers
3 workers
4workers
Sworkers
6workers
Tworkers
Sworkers
Use a local copy of MySQL and two or more local workers
using the manyworkers.txt configuration file and -
autoshutdown worker command line option.
Example command line: ant 2workers
The Ant flag "-Dnoshutdown=l" can also be given to cause
the spawned workers to never shutdown even if no work is
available, by omitting the "-autoshutdown" flag when
spawning worker instances. Example command line:
ant -Dnoshutdown=l 2workers
                               Table J-3 New ANT Tasks
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                                  Page J-9

-------
March 2012
                               MOVES2010b User Guide
maketodo
Start a local copy of MySQL and one master that is set to only
generate TODO files without getting DONE files or deleting
TODO, DONE, or InProgress files upon exiting. Before
using, edit the maketodo.txt file to use your system's
sharedDistributedFolderPath. Use "-Drunspec=" to specify
the runspec. Example command line:
ant -Drunspec=MyCounty2030.mrs maketodo
pickup
Start a local copy of MySQL and one master that will retrieve
and process DONE files.  Before using, edit the maketodo.txt
file to use your system's sharedDistributedFolderPath. Use "-
Dpdspec=" to name the required PDSpec XML file. Example
command line:
ant -Dpdspec=c:\myinfo\filestoget.xml pickup
masterlworker
Start a local copy of MySQL with one master that is set to
create one worker and wait for its DONE files.  Before using,
edit maketodo.txt and manyworkers.txt.  Like maketodo, use
"-Drunspec=" to specify the runspec. Example command
line:
ant -Drunspec=MyCounty2030.mrs masterlworker
                          Table J-3New ANT Tasks (continued)

      Note that several Ant tasks make use of a local MySQL instance. These tasks detect the
presence of a running MySQL instance and will start, use, then stop a local MySQL instance, if
one was not already running.
Page J-10
                     United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                                 March 2012
Master Command Line Options

       The MOVES master supports the following command line options to its Java class
(gov.epa.otaq.moves.master.commandline.MO VESCommandLine):
Option
Description
-i IMPORTXMLFILE
Perform all data import operations as specified in the import XML
file.  This allows automation of the operations normally performed
via the GUI using the County Data Manager or Project Data
Manager.  An example import XML file can be obtained through
these GUI panels.

XCaution!  Versions up to and including MOVES2010b require
access to a graphical user interface, such as Windows or an X
Windows server, to use this feature even though no graphical
elements are displayed during the process.
-maketodo
Or
-onlytodo
Causes the command line master to only produce TODO files,
ignoring DONE files and to not delete its TODO, InProgress, or
DONE files upon exit.  This is an essential feature for cluster
computing where a master may not be allowed to run while
workers process its TODO files. This mode also prevents a local
worker from being started.
-noworker
Causes the command line master to not start a local worker. This
behavior is automatic with the "-maketodo'V'-onlytodo" option.
workerconfig=FILENAME
Specify an alternate configuration file to be used if a local worker
is started. The new set of ANT tasks use the manyworkers.txt
configuration file extensively. The default file used is
WorkerConfiguration.txt.
-p PDSPECXMLFILE
Collect all DONE files specified in the PDSpec XML file. The
master GUI has a tool to generate these XML files.
-rRUNSPEC
Run a single RunSpec file name (with optional path).
-rl RUNSPECLISTFILE
Specify a text file containing a list of RunSpec file names (with
optional paths) to be run, one runspec per line. This is equivalent
to using the "-r" option on each RunSpec named in the text file.
                        Table J-4 Master Command Line Options
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                                     Page J-11

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
Setting the Master Configuration File

       The master loads its configuration file before its command line processing takes place.
As such, there is no command line option for the master to alter its use of a configuration file.
Instead, the master uses a Java Property named "MOVES_CONFIGURATION_FILE_NAME"
to specify an alternate configuration file that should be read. When this property is set and set to
non-empty, its value is used as the name and optional path to the master's configuration file.

Worker Command Line Options

       The MOVES worker supports the following command line options to its Java class
(gov.epa.otaq. moves, worker. WorkerCommandLine):
Option
-autoshutdown
-longshutdown
-config=FILENAME
Description
Close the worker instance after no TODO or InProgress files were
found in the worker's shared work folder for 2 minutes. Workers will
continue to exist, idling, if there are InProgress files in the shared work
folder, in case the workers performing the work in those files fail. This
option is useful on a shared computer where workers cannot be left
running indefinitely, as is their default without this command line
option.
Similar to -autoshutdown but uses a 2 hour timeout instead of a 2
minute timeout.
Specify an alternate configuration file to be used. The new set of ANT
tasks use the manyworkers.txt configuration file extensively.
                        Table J-5 Worker Command Line Options
Page J-12
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
                                                March 2012
Configuration Files

      MOVES uses several configuration files, all of which have case-sensitive names.
File
Purpose
MOVESConfiguration.txt
Default master configuration file. Rarely used with cluster
computing.  Used with the master GUI ("ant -rungui").
defaultServerName = localhost
defaultDatabaseName = movesdb20100913
defaultUserName =
defaultPassword =
nrdefaultServerName =
nrdefaultDatabaseName =
nrdefaultUserName =
nrdefaultPassword =
executionServerName = localhost
executionDatabaseName = MOVESExecution
executionUserName =
executionPassword =
outputServerName = localhost
outputDatabaseName = MOVESOutput
outputUserName =
outputPassword =
sharedDistributedFolderPath =
C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\SharedWork
computerlDPath =
masterFolderPath = C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource
saveTODOPath =
WorkerConfiguration.txt
Default worker configuration file.  Rarely used with cluster
computing.  Used with the traditional worker GUI ("ant -
runworker").
 sharedDistributedFolderPath =
C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\SharedWork
workFolderPath =
C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\WorkerFolder
workerDatabaseName = MOVESWorker
computerlDPath =
                         Table J-6 MOVES Configuration Files
United States Environmental Protection Agency
                                                     Page J-13

-------
March 2012
                                            MOVES2010b User Guide
maketodo.txt
Master configuration file specified by Ant tasks for cluster computing.
Modify this file to specify your system's shared folder for TODO and DONE
files. Do not modify data server or database names in this file.

defaultServerName = localhost
defaultDatabaseName = movesdb20100712
defaultUserName =
defaultPassword =
nrdefaultServerName = localhost
nrdefaultDatabaseName =
nrdefaultUserName =
nrdefaultPassword =
executionServerName = localhost
executionDatabaseName = *
executionUserName =
executionPassword =
outputServerName = localhost
outputDatabaseName = MOVESOutput
outputUserName =
outputPassword =
sharedDistributedFolderPath =
C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\SharedWork
computerlDPath =
masterFolderPath = .
saveTODOPath =
manyworkers.txt
Worker configuration file specified by Ant tasks for cluster computing.
Modify this file to specify your system's shared folder for TODO and DONE
files. Do not modify data server or database names in this file.

sharedDistributedFolderPath =
C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\SharedWork
workFolderPath = manyworkers/workerfolder
workerDatabaseName = *
computerlDPath =
workerServerName = localhost
workerUserName =
workerPassword =
concurrentStatements = 1
                    Table J-6 MOVES Configuration Files (continued)
Page J-14
                                  United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

Accessing Remote MySQL Servers

       It may be desirable to centralize some of the databases used by MOVES, such as the
default database and county - or project-specific input databases.  Storing these databases on a
single MySQL instance can make management easier, especially if the data is changed
frequently, as often occurs during initial stages of data testing.

       RunSpec files can contain the server name of input databases, county domain databases,
project domain databases, and even output databases.  These all have "servername" XML
attributes that when left blank indicate use of "localhost". No user name or password is required
or given when MOVES connects to these databases.

       The default database used by the MOVES master can be set in MOVESConfiguration.txt
and maketodo.txt.  Both support providing not only the server name, but also a user name and
password, if required. The relevant configuration  entries are:

       defaultServerName
       defaultDatabaseName
       defaultUserName
       defaultPassword

       The database used by the master to store execution data can be stored on a remote
MySQL server and is set within MOVESConfiguration.txt and maketodo.txt.  The relevant
configuration entries are:

       executi on S erverNam e
       executionDatabaseName
       executi onUserName
       executionPassword

       The executionDatabaseName entry also supports use of a single asterisk ("*") to indicate
use of an automatically assigned database name.  If two or more masters wish to use the same
MySQL instance (whether remote or local), each  must have a different execution database name.
This can be accomplished by manually configuring each to have a specific name or by setting
each with "executionDatabaseName = *" in their  configuration files.

       The database used by each worker to store temporary calculations can be stored on a
remote MySQL server and is set within WorkerConfiguration.txt and manyworkers.txt.  The
relevant configuration entries are:

       workerServerName
       workerDatabaseName
       workerUserName
       workerPassword

       The workerDatabaseName entry supports  use of a single asterisk ("*") to indicate use of
an automatically assigned database name.  If two  or more workers wish to use the same MySQL
instance (whether remote or local), each must have a different worker database name. This can

United States Environmental Protection Agency                                             Page J-15

-------
March 2012	MOVES2010b User Guide

be accomplished by manually configuring each to have a specific name or by setting each with
"workerDatabaseName = *" in their configuration files.

Local MySQL

      Ant can start a local instance of MySQL, one that has not been preinstalled and that runs
entirely within the MOVES installation folder. When Ant uses such a local instance, it follows
these steps:

       1)  Checks for an existing MySQL instance by checking the standard MySQL server
          TCP/IP port 3306.

      2)  If a local MySQL exists, then Ant performs the desired operation that uses MySQL,
          such as running a master or worker.

      3)  Otherwise, Ant starts the MySQL server process, performs the desired operation that
          uses MySQL, then shutdowns the MySQL server process.

      It is important to note that with the above steps, Ant tasks that use a local MySQL
instance will not shutdown a MySQL service/daemon that was already running.  However, the
Ant task "stopmysql" will stop an existing service/daemon, since the task has no information
available about how MySQL was started.

      When Ant launches a MySQL server process, the process is bound to the
localhost/127.0.0.1  network only, making it inaccessible from other nodes. In addition, all
security restrictions are removed for connections, meaning no MySQL users IDs or passwords
need to be configured.

      Before you can use the local MySQL features, MySQL files that are appropriate for your
system must be provided, be it Windows or Linux, 32-bit or 64-bit. To begin this process, locate
the "mysql" directory under the installation folder of MOVES.  It contains a file called "my.ini".
This is the local MySQL's configuration and you may update the contents to optimize the
memory usage for your system. Do not, however, modify any directory paths in this file,
especially the "basedir" and "datadir" entries. It is also advisable to edit manyworkers.txt and
maketodo.txt to your system's shared work folder.

Creating TODO Files

      The MOVES master has a mode that only generates TODO files without picking up, or
processing DONE files. If using the direct command line, use the "-r" or "-rl" command line
options along with the "-maketodo" option.  If using Ant, use the "maketodo" task, such as:

      ant -Drunspec=c:\myrunspecs\runspecl.mrs maketodo.

      Before using the Ant "maketodo" task, configure your local MySQL and edit
maketodo.txt to use your system's shared work folder. Do not alter server or database names in
maketodo.txt.
Page J-16                                             United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide	March 2012

Running More than 2 Workers on One Node

       Multiple MOVES workers can be run on a single node. Each worker requires a unique
database name and the easiest method of doing this is by setting the workerDatabaseName entry
to "*" in WorkerConfiguration.txt and manyworkers.txt. There are technically other methods of
accomplishing this with earlier versions of MOVES but they are substantially more error prone
and will not be covered here.

       The Ant "1 worker", "2workers", and other tasks use the manyworkers.txt configuration
file, passing it to the workers using the -config=FILE command line parameter along with the -
autoshutdown flag.  Workers launched with these tasks will terminate gracefully after 2 minutes
without TODO or InProgress files.

       Before using the Ant tasks, configure your local MySQL and edit manyworkers.txt to use
your system's shared work folder.  Do not alter server or database names in manyworkers.txt.

Processing DONE  Files - Command Line DONE Files

       A MOVES master can pick-up DONE files created for other masters.  When doing so, it
creates records in its own output database (as opposed to the output database designated in the
original runspec). The master "-p" command line option is used to automate the retrieval of
these files. If using Ant, use the "pickup" task such as:

ant -Dpdspec=c:\myinfo\filestoget.xml pickup

       When using these options, you must provide a "PDSpec" XML file ("Pickup Done
Specification"). An example file follows:


       
              5880486781340065678
              C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\SharedWork
              
       
       
              3686433322585912670
              C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\SharedWork
              
       


       The above file shows two sets of DONE files that will be retrieved, both from the same
folder and both destined for the same output database.  Each will get a separate MOVESRun
entry in the database.
United States Environmental Protection Agency                                            Page J-17

-------
March 2012
          MOVES2010b User Guide
Processing DONE Files - GUI DONE Files

      MOVES has a GUI for creating these PDSpec XML files and for processing DONE files.
The GUI is activated from the "Tools" menu:
A
Post Processing Tools .Settings jHelp
| Multiple Run Spec Creator
1 Process DON EFites
nd it is shown partially filled here:

,, PDSpec Editor {^^m


UUNh riles
Master ID: 4974243277744585005
Folder: C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\SharedWork\Saved
r\ * * n +

Server: Database: pdtest ^ Refresh

Create Database


ID 3686433322585912670 into pdtest from C:\EPA\MOVES\MOVESGHGSource\Sn...

Initiate Processing
Browse DONE Fites™
Use

Remove

Save,,.

Load...

Done
J
       To use the GUI, click Browse DONE Files and select a DONE file.
Page J-18
United States Environmental Protection Agency

-------
MOVES2010b User Guide
March 2012
You will be pre

sented with details extracted from the bundle:
[^| DONE File
Ile: 368643332258591 2670_1_DONE
stalls:
^^
OK

Cancel

aster ID: 3686433322585912670
aster Computer ID: Zissou
unSpecFile:test1
unSpec Date: 2010-3-29 18:47:15
utput:
undies Expected: 2



       If the DONE file is desired, click OK. This will populate the "Master ID" and "Folder"
fields in the PDSpec GUI. Next, specify the output database just as is done with the primary
MOVES GUI then click the Use button.

       Click the Save button to generate a PDSpec XML file from your selections.

       Click the Load button to populate the selections list with the contents of an existing
PDSpec XML file.

       Click the Done button to close the GUI without processing the DONE files, but with the
option to save your selections into an XML file for later use.

       Click the Initiate Processing button to pick up the DONE files immediately.
United States Environmental Protection Agency
     Page J-19

-------